JP7083220B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachinko machine") or a rotating drum type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a "pachislot machine").

There is known a gaming machine that is provided with an operating means that can be operated by a player and whose production proceeds in conjunction with an operation input to the operating means by the player. In such a gaming machine, for example, in a variable staging that suggests the degree of expectation of an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, an image or the like that prompts the operation of the operating means is displayed, and the operation input of the operating means is accepted. It has been proposed to promote the production as an opportunity. Further, such a gaming machine is provided with a detecting means such as a sensor for detecting the operation of the operating means by the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-180365

However , there is a risk that the entertainment interest will decline.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player .

In order to solve the above problems, one aspect of the present invention adopts the following configuration. It is provided with a reception that can accept a game ball and a lottery means that can execute a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the reception, and the player can be determined based on the result of the lottery being a specific result. It is a gaming machine that executes advantageous hit games,
A first display means capable of displaying an effect according to the result of the lottery in the display area, and
A second display means arranged in front of the first display means at a predetermined distance, and a second display means.
A movable body made movable so as to cover the display area of the first display means from the standby position to the operation position.
Equipped with
The second display means has a transparent light guide plate and a plurality of light emitting units arranged on one end surface side of the plurality of end faces of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting unit is the light from the light guide plate. A predetermined pattern appears on the front side of the light guide plate by being incident from one end face side.
The pattern appearing on the front side of the light guide plate has a plurality of embodiments including a first pattern and a second pattern having a different aspect from the first pattern, and the pattern appearing in the plurality of embodiments is the above-mentioned. It is possible to appear by multiple light emitting parts arranged on one end face side,
The first display area of the light guide plate on which the first pattern appears and the second display area of the light guide plate on which the second pattern appears are the light from the light emitting portion arranged on the one end face side. Overlapping in the incident direction of
The first pattern appears in the second display means in the incident region where the light emitting portion that emits light when the first pattern appears in the second display means receives light from the end face of the second display means. The first display area is smaller than the end face side picture area projected onto the end face of the second display means provided with the light emitting portion capable of appearing the first picture.
By causing the patterns including the first pattern and the second pattern to emit light in a specific order, the movement is such that the light guide plate provided with the light emitting portion is separated from the one end face side . A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute a light emitting effect to be executed.

According to one aspect of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the staging operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a staging operation unit is in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the hinge assembly on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the staging operation unit in a dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of a staging operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit seen from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the staging operation ring of the staging operation unit as seen from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation ring as seen from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation ring disassembled and viewed from the top front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation ring disassembled and viewed from the bottom front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotation drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation button unit of the staging operation unit disassembled and seen from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front and bottom. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the staging operation ring and the staging operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the staging operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and bottom. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank ball path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main composition and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut in the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of the game area where a game ball is distributed in a game board. It is a front view of a center role and a table production unit in a table unit of a game board. It is a side sectional view seen from the right by cutting the front effect unit together with the center accessory at the center in the left-right direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the LED in a table effect unit, and the reflection concave part of a table light guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emitting mode of the front light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the front light guide plate of a table effect unit is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the lower front center decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower center elevating base is raised in the lower movable staging unit, and the lower front center decoration body and the lower rear center decoration body are made to emit light. In the lower movable staging unit, the lower center elevating base, the lower left side elevating base and the lower right side elevating base are raised to emit light from the lower front center decoration, the lower rear center decoration, the lower left side decoration, and the lower right side decoration. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of being made. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the raised position while the game board is in the state of FIG. 108. The four rotating decorations, the left side rotating decoration, the left sub-side rotating decoration, the right side rotating decoration, and the right sub-side rotating decoration in the lower movable staging unit are developed respectively to outline the decoration of the decoration part on each side. It is explanatory drawing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the type (size) of the arrow which is light-emitting and displays in the lower movable staging unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body are lowered of the upper rear movable production unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable staging unit schematicly from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable staging unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable staging unit. It is a block diagram which shows the control composition of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main control side power-on processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a timer interrupt process of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol / special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a special symbol variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of a variation pattern selection determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the peripheral control part power-on processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the peripheral control part timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the transition of the bit string in the work area which holds the detection history of a pressure detection sensor. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st example of a pressing operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd example of a pressing operation determination process. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd example of a pressing operation determination process. It is a top view of the staging operation unit to which a plurality of pressure detection sensors and a plurality of pressure detection pieces are attached, as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the staging operation unit button unit. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st example of the pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd example of the pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd example of the pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th example of the pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. It is a timing chart which shows the 5th example of the pressing operation determination processing using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the production including the special production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the descending position determination processing.

The gaming machine of the present embodiment includes, for example, the means described below.
Means 1: In a gaming machine
"The game area where the game is played and
A frame-shaped front component that partitions the outer circumference of the game area, and
A flat plate-shaped game panel attached to the rear side of the front component and partitioning the rear end of the game area,
The unit base attached to the game panel and
Front view A main decorative body that is movable and visible from the front between the evacuation position near the periphery and the appearance position near the center in the game area, and has a predetermined decoration formed. When,
When the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, the main decorative body moves from the first position where they overlap each other to the second position where the overlap is eliminated in the front view. With multiple sub-decorative bodies attached and forming a given decoration,
A drive motor attached to the unit base and moving the main decorative body between the retracted position and the appearance position according to a gaming state that changes as a game is played in the gaming area.
It is arranged in the center of the gaming area in front view behind the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, and is provided with an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image. " It is a feature.

Here, as the "game", "a game medium is driven into a specific entrance where a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous is performed, and the game medium is driven to the specific entrance. When the special lottery result in which an advantageous game state is generated by acceptance is drawn, a specific reception port for paying out a predetermined number of game media is opened by acceptance of the game medium, so that the game medium is aimed at a specific reception. "Game to drive", "Game to drive the game medium aiming at the entrance where the privilege including payout of the game medium is given", "Multiple symbols with multiple symbols after the game medium is input" After rotating the rotating body, a game in which the rotation of each rotating body is stopped so as to be a combination of symbols to which a privilege including payout of a game medium is given "and the like can be mentioned. Examples of the above-mentioned "game medium" include "spherical ones (game balls)", "disk-shaped ones (medals)", and the like.

In addition, as the "game area" where the game is performed, "there is a plurality of entrances where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player and the privilege including the payout of the game medium is given according to the acceptance of the game medium. Each has multiple symbols, and each is rotated by the player's start operation triggered by the input of the game medium, and at the same time, the combination of the symbols stopped by the player's stop operation. An area in which a plurality of rotating fuselage bodies are arranged to which a privilege including a payout of a game medium is given depending on the situation, etc. may be mentioned.

Further, examples of the "game panel" include "transparent plate" and "opaque plate", and examples of the material include "plywood (for example, veneer plate)", "assembled material", "metal plate", and "acrylic resin". Examples thereof include "plate", "polycarbonate resin plate", "ABS resin plate", "polypropylene plate", "polyacrylic resin plate", "methacrylic resin plate", "glass plate" and the like.

Furthermore, as "decoration" of the main decorative body and the sub-decorative body, "decoration imitating an item according to the concept of the gaming machine", "decoration imitating a logo or dialogue according to the concept of the gaming machine", "game" "Decoration that imitates a character according to the concept of the machine", "Decoration that imitates a geometric pattern", "Decoration that imitates animals and plants", "Decoration that imitates a landscape or background", etc.

Moreover, as the moving direction of the main decorative body, "vertical direction", "horizontal direction", "diagonal direction" and the like can be mentioned. In addition, as the movement of the "sub-decorative body", "rotation around the axis extending in the front-back direction around the main decorative body", "movement in the vertical direction", "movement in the horizontal direction", etc. are mentioned. Be done.

Further, as a moving mechanism of the sub-decorative body that moves from the first position to the second position as the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, "one end is attached to the unit base. At the same time, the other end is provided with a rod-shaped link member attached to the sub-decorative body, and the link member presses or pulls the sub-decorative body by moving the main decorative body to move the sub-decorative body. " , "A mechanism in which the main decorative body is provided with a gear that rotates with the movement of the main decorative body, and the sub-decorative body is moved by the rotation of the gear" and the like.

Further, when a plurality of sub-decorative bodies are in the first position, only one sub-decorative body may be visible from the front, or a plurality of sub-decorative bodies smaller than the total number can be visually recognized from the front. You may try to.

Further, examples of the "drive motor" include a "stepping motor", a "DC motor", a "brushless DC motor", an "ultrasonic motor" and the like.

In addition, as "effect display means", "liquid crystal display (LCD)", "cathode ray tube (cathode ray tube) display device (CRT)", "plasma display", "laser display", "LED display device", "organic" Examples include "EL display device" and "electronic paper display device".

Further, as the "effect image" displayed on the effect display means, "the effect image in which the character according to the concept of the game machine is displayed", "the effect image in which the item according to the concept of the game machine is displayed", and the like. "Direction image displaying a logo according to the concept of the game machine", "Direction image displaying lines according to the concept of the game machine", "Assisting the game (for example," right-handed "," aiming at the navel "" , "Stop button operation timing", etc.) "," Production image that suggests the game status such as the number of holds and the number of rounds "," Multiple variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols After the images are stopped, the images are stopped and displayed in sequence, and the combination of the displayed symbols is used to suggest the result of the special lottery drawn by accepting the game medium to the starting port. " When the combination of displayed symbols satisfies the combination of symbols that causes an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous, the remaining symbols are stopped and displayed (reach effect). Image) ”,“ Production image that encourages the player to participate in the player participation type production ”, and the like.

By the way, in the conventional technique as in Patent Document 1, a drive motor for moving a plurality of rotary decorations in the vertical direction, a drive motor for rotating a plurality of rotary decorations, and a plurality of rotary decorations are used. Since it is equipped with a drive solenoid for locking the rotation, it is necessary to control many drive means such as a drive motor and a drive solenoid in order to perform an effect (movable effect) using a plurality of rotation ornaments. Therefore, the control applied to the production becomes complicated and the load becomes high, which makes it difficult to perform the production by other decorative bodies at the same time, and the monotonous production in which a plurality of rotating decorative bodies only descend and rotate. There was a risk that it would easily become.

According to the configuration of the means 1, the gaming machine is attached to the gaming area where the game is played, the frame-shaped front component that divides the outer periphery of the game area, and the rear side of the front component, and is attached to the game area. Between the flat plate-shaped game panel that divides the rear end, the unit base attached to the game panel, and the evacuation position near the periphery and the appearance position near the center in the front view game area on the unit base. The main decorative body that is movable and visible from the front and has a predetermined decoration formed, and when the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, from the first position where they overlap each other in the front view. It is attached to the main decoration so that it moves to a second position where it moves to each other and the overlap is eliminated, and it is attached to multiple sub-decorations in which a predetermined decoration is formed and to the unit base. A drive motor that moves the main decorative body between the retracted position and the appearance position according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area, and behind the main decorative body and a plurality of sub-decorative bodies. It is arranged in the center of the front view game area, and is provided with an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image.

As a result, under normal conditions, the main decorative body is located in the retracted position near the peripheral edge in the front view gaming area, and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are located in the first position where they overlap each other in the front-rear direction. , The main decorative body can be seen near the periphery in the front view game area, and at least one sub-decorative body can be seen adjacent to the main decorative body, and the main decorative body and the sub-decorative body can be used to decorate the game area. The appearance of the gaming machine is improved. In the normal state, since the plurality of sub-decorative bodies located in the first position overlap each other in the front-rear direction, only the frontmost sub-decorative body can be seen from the front (player side). It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the sub-decorative body arranged on the side, and it is possible to recognize that the main decorative body and the sub-decorative body are only the number currently visible. Further, in the normal state, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are in the retracted positions near the outer edge of the front-viewing game area, so that the effect display means arranged in the center of the front-viewing game area can be used. The displayed effect image is not obstructed by the main decorative body or the like, and the effect image can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, and the effect image can be entertained by the player. In this normal state, when the drive motor is driven according to the game state that changes due to the game being played in the game area, the main decorative body in the evacuation position moves to the appearance position near the center of the front view game area. At the same time, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies that overlap each other in the first position will move to the second position that does not overlap in the front-rear direction. At this time, since (a part of) the effect image is blocked by the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, it is possible to make the player notice the movement of the main decorative body and the like and pay attention to it. Therefore, since all the number of sub-decorative bodies will appear around the main decorative body that has moved to the center of the game area, the player's surprise can be surprised by increasing the number of sub-decorative bodies, and the main By expanding a plurality of sub-decorative bodies around the decorative body, the overall decoration can be enlarged, which can give a strong impact to the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the main decorative body can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the game state, the main decorative body changes when the game state changes in the normal state of the retracted position. Depending on whether or not the player moves to the appearance position, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the expectation for the main decorative body can be increased to entertain the player. Then, when the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, a plurality of sub-decorative bodies spread around the main decorative body, and the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies can show a large decoration to the player. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Furthermore, by moving the main decorative body to the appearance position by driving the drive motor, it is possible to show the player a large decoration with the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, and raise the player's expectation. Therefore, it is suggested that there is a high possibility (expected value) of an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous to the player by moving the main decorative body to the appearance position. It is possible to display the expected value in the main decorative body and a plurality of sub-decorative bodies.

In addition, the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area, and by moving the main decorative body to the appearance position, it becomes easier to secure a space around the main decorative body. Multiple sub-decorative bodies can be moved from the first position to the second position and spread around the main decorative body at the appearance position, and the main decorative body and the multiple sub-decorative bodies form as large a decoration as possible. can do. Therefore, when the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the game state, a large decoration by the main decorative body and a plurality of sub-decorative bodies spread around the main decorative body is given to the player near the center of the game area. Being able to show can surprise the player, attract the player's attention to the center of the playing area, and entertain the large decoration with the main decoration and multiple sub-decorations. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, a plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position, and one drive motor is used to move the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies from the first position to the second position. Since the sub-decorative body of the above is moved, it is only necessary to control one drive motor when performing an effect (movable effect) using the main decorative body and a plurality of sub-decorative bodies. The load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing an effect using the main decorative body and a plurality of sub-decorative bodies, even if the effect using other movable decorative objects, luminescent decorative bodies, etc. is performed at the same time, the load on the control of the effect is increased. Since it can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the movement of the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies from being jerky due to the unstable control of the staging due to the overload, and the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies can be prevented from being jerky. It is possible to make a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect by surely exerting the effect of the effect using the sub-decorative body of.

It is desirable that the main decorative body be attached to the unit base so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the appearance position near the upper edge in the front view game area. As a result, in the normal state where the main decorative body is located in the retracted position, the main decorative body is visible together with at least one sub-decorative body in the vicinity of the upper edge in the front view game area. In this state, when the drive motor is driven according to the game state, the main decorative body moves downward together with the plurality of sub-decorative bodies to be the appearance position near the center of the front view game area, and the main decorative body is formed. Since multiple sub-decorative bodies will spread around the, the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies will descend to make the player feel as if a bulletin board from heaven is given to the player. Is possible, and it is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") that is advantageous to the player will occur, raising expectations for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state and reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

Also, one end is rotatably attached to the unit base and the other end is rotatably attached to the sub-decorative body, allowing multiple sub-decorative bodies to be rotatably attached from the first position to the second position. A plurality of rod-shaped link members to be moved may be further provided. As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies move together, but the sub-decorative body is unit-based via the link member. Since it is attached to the main decorative body, the sub-decorative body that is going to move together with the main decorative body is pulled toward the unit base side by the link member, and this force changes the position of the sub-decorative body with respect to the main decorative body. The sub-decorative body will move from the first position to the second position. On the other hand, when the main decorative body moves from the appearance position to the retracted position, the sub-decorative body is pushed by the link member, the sub-decorative body moves from the second position to the first position, and the initial state (first state). It is possible to return to the normal state where it is located. In this way, the sub-decorative body can be moved from the first position to the second position via the link member only by moving the main decorative body from the retracted position to the appearance position. The machine can be surely embodied.

Further, when the link member as described above is provided, one end of the link member is set to the moving direction of the main decorative body within a range shorter than the moving distance of the main decorative body with respect to the unit base. It is desirable to mount it so that it can slide in the same direction. As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies move together. At this time, since one end of the link member to which the other end is attached to the sub-decorative body is attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the moving direction of the main decorative body, it is together with the main decorative body. The link member is pulled in the moving direction of the main decorative body by the sub-decorative body that moves to, and one end of the link member slides with respect to the unit base. Since one end of the link member is slidable within a range shorter than the movement distance of the main decoration, one end of the link member slides before the main decoration reaches the appearance position. You will reach the end of the direction. Then, when one end of the link member reaches the end in the slide direction and then the main decorative body further moves in the direction of the appearance position, one end of the link member further moves in the direction of the appearance position. Therefore, the link member pulls the sub-decorative body that tries to move together with the main decorative body toward the unit base side, and this force changes the position of the sub-decorative body with respect to the main decorative body, and the sub-decorative body is changed. Will move from the first position to the second position. Therefore, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies remain in the first position until one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction. When the main decoration moves together with the main decoration in the state and one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction, the main decoration moves in the direction of the appearance position and a plurality of sub decorations move from the first position. It will move to the second position and spread around the main decorative body, and it is possible to show the player a movable effect that moves in two stages by the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies, so the drive motor can be appropriately used. By controlling, it is possible to stop the movement (directing) in the first stage or move (directing) to the second stage, and it is possible to move (directing) using the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies. The variation can be increased, the player can be entertained by various effects, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Further, as described above, when one end of the link member is slidably attached in the moving direction of the main decorative body, a plurality of sub-decorative bodies are formed while the main decorative body is moving to the appearance position. Since the sub-decorative body moves to the second position, the speed at which the sub-decorative body moves to the second position is relatively faster than the moving speed of the main decorative body, so that multiple sub-decorative bodies move around the main decorative body. The movement can be made to suddenly spread, and the player can be surprised to enjoy the production using the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies. Further, in this case, after the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position to some extent, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position. That is, since the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the front view game area to the center side to some extent, and then moved from the first position to the second position so as to spread around the main decorative body, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved. When the decorative body moves to the second position, the sub-decorative body can be made difficult to come into contact with other members, and the sub-decorative body and other members can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, as described above, when one end of the link member is slidably attached in the moving direction of the main decorative body, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the main decorative body and the main decorative body are attached. Since the movement of multiple sub-decorative bodies can be changed in two stages, the player has an advantage when stopped in the first stage and when stopped in the second stage. It is possible to recognize that the possibility (expected value) of the game state is different, and it is possible to suggest that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and the main decoration body. And a plurality of sub-decorative bodies can display various expected values to the player.

Further, a plurality of sub-decorative bodies may be rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body. As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies rotate around the main decorative body. By moving in such a way, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which a fan is spread by a plurality of sub-decorative bodies. In addition, by moving the plurality of sub-decorative bodies from the first position to the second position, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are arranged radially around the main decorative body, and the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are arranged in a radial pattern. It is possible to show the player a decoration that spreads out in a large radial pattern with the body. In this way, by performing the effect using the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained, and the player can be given an impression of spreading. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, a pair of sub-decorative bodies arranged on both sides of the main decorative body and a connecting member connecting the pair of sub-decorative bodies to each other and attached to the rear side of the main decorative body. When the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, the sub-decorative bodies on both sides of the main decorative body are moved from the first position where the sub-decorative bodies are overlapped with each other in the front view, and the overlap is eliminated. It may be provided with a plurality of sub-decorative unit units that move to the second position. As a result, in the normal state where the main decorative body is located in the retracted position, the sub-decorative bodies are visible on both sides of the main decorative body. In this normal state, when the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies that overlap each other on both sides of the main decorative body move to the second position, respectively. As a result, the overlap between the two is eliminated and the main decorative body is spread around the main decorative body, so that a large decoration can be shown to the player by the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies. Can be played. When a plurality of sub-decorative bodies move from the first position to the second position, a pair of sub-decorative bodies sandwiched between the main decorative bodies are connected by a connecting member to form one sub-decorative body unit. Therefore, since a pair of sub-decorative bodies can be moved by moving the connecting member, half the number of sub-decorative bodies (connecting member) is compared with the case where all the number of sub-decorative bodies are moved respectively. ) Shall be moved, and the configuration related to the movement of the sub-decorative body can be made a simple configuration, and it is possible to easily embody a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect.

Further, as described above, when a plurality of sub-decorative body units are provided, the connecting member of the sub-decorative body unit is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body. Is desirable. As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, the plurality of sub-decorative body units extend back and forth around the center of the main decorative body via the connecting member. Multiple sub-decorative bodies that were located in the first position on both sides of the main decorative body and overlapped back and forth by rotating around the axis, respectively, rotate around the main decorative body so that the overlap is eliminated. Since it moves to the second position, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that the fan spreads by multiple sub-decorative bodies, and the player can see the decoration that spreads greatly radially between the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies. In addition to being able to show, it is possible to give the player an impression of spreading and make them think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, a plurality of main light emitting means which are attached to the rear side of the main decorative body and can irradiate light toward the front, and a plurality of main light emitting means which are attached to the rear side of each of the plurality of sub-decorative bodies and can irradiate light toward the front. A plurality of sub-light emitting means may be further provided. As a result, when the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means are made to emit light, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can be independently light-emitting and decorated. , The player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decorative body and the like. Therefore, before the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are luminescently decorated by the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the main decorative body or the like, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the main decorative body or the like is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, and the player is entertained. be able to. And when the drive motor moves the main decoration to the appearance position on the center side of the game area and multiple sub-decorations spread around the main decoration, there is nothing good that surprises the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. When the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position on the center side, if the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are luminescently decorated by the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means, the decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area is played. Since it can be shown to a person, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous occurs, and raise the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, it is desirable to further provide an effect display means that is arranged in the center of the front view game area behind the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies and can display the effect image. As a result, in the normal state, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are in the retracted position near the outer edge of the front-viewing game area, so that the effect display means arranged in the center of the front-viewing game area. The staging image displayed on the screen is not obstructed by the main decorative body or the like, and the staging image can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, and the staging image can be entertained by the player. In this normal state, when the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position on the central side in the game area by the drive motor, the effect image (a part of) is blocked by the main decorative body and a plurality of sub-decorative bodies. The player can be made aware of the movement of the main decorative body and the like, and can move from the first position to the second position to show a plurality of sub-decorative bodies spreading around the main decorative body. Therefore, in the center of the gaming area, a large decoration by the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies can be surely shown to the player, and the gaming machine can surely exhibit the above-mentioned action and effect.

Means 2: In the configuration of Means 1.
"The main ornament is
It is characterized in that it is attached to the unit base so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the appearance position near the upper edge in the game area in front view. "

According to the configuration of the means 2, the main decorative body is attached to the unit base so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the appearance position near the upper edge in the front view game area.

As a result, in the normal state where the main decorative body is located in the retracted position, the main decorative body is visible together with at least one sub-decorative body in the vicinity of the upper edge in the front view game area. In this state, when the drive motor is driven according to the game state, the main decorative body moves downward together with the plurality of sub-decorative bodies to be the appearance position near the center of the front view game area, and the main decorative body is formed. Since multiple sub-decorative bodies will spread around the, the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies will descend to make the player feel as if a bulletin board from heaven is given to the player. Is possible, and it is possible to strongly think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") that is advantageous to the player will occur, raising expectations for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state and reducing the interest. Can be suppressed.

Means 3: In the configuration of Means 1 or Means 2.
"One end is rotatably attached to the unit base and the other end is rotatably attached to the sub-decorative body so that the plurality of the sub-decorative bodies are rotatably attached to the sub-decorative body from the first position. Multiple rod-shaped link members that move to the second position, respectively,
It is characterized by being "further equipped".

Here, the "link member" may be any as long as it extends in a rod shape, and "one end portion rotatably attached to the unit base is further slidably attached in the direction of the main decorative body". "The one that is rotatably attached to the unit base, one end that is attached so that it cannot slide", and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 3, one end of the gaming machine is rotatably attached to the unit base, and the other end is rotatably attached to the sub-decorative body. Is further provided with a plurality of rod-shaped link members that move the slingshot from the first position to the second position.

As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies move together, but the sub-decorative body is unit-based via the link member. Since it is attached to the main decorative body, the sub-decorative body that is going to move together with the main decorative body is pulled toward the unit base side by the link member, and this force changes the position of the sub-decorative body with respect to the main decorative body. The sub-decorative body will move from the first position to the second position. On the other hand, when the main decorative body moves from the appearance position to the retracted position, the sub-decorative body is pushed by the link member, the sub-decorative body moves from the second position to the first position, and the initial state (first state). It is possible to return to the normal state where it is located. In this way, the sub-decorative body can be moved from the first position to the second position via the link member only by moving the main decorative body from the retracted position to the appearance position. The machine can be surely embodied.

Means 4: In the configuration of means 3,
"The link member is
One end is slidably attached to the unit base in the same direction as the movement direction of the main decoration within a range shorter than the movement distance of the main decoration. " do.

Here, as a configuration for slidably mounting the main decorative body in the moving direction, "a link is attached to the tip of a rod-shaped rod member whose base end side is rotatably attached to the unit base only within a predetermined rotation angle range. "Structure in which one end of the member is rotatably attached", "A slit extending in the moving direction of the main decorative body is formed on the unit base, and one end of the link member can be slidable in the slit." Examples thereof include "a configuration for mounting", "a configuration in which a columnar sliding pin is provided on the unit base and a slit in which the sliding pin is slidably inserted is formed in the link member".

According to the configuration of means 4, one end of the link member is slidably attached to the unit base in the same direction as the movement direction of the main decoration within a range shorter than the movement distance of the main decoration. It is the one that was made.

As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies move together. At this time, since one end of the link member to which the other end is attached to the sub-decorative body is attached to the unit base so as to be slidable in the moving direction of the main decorative body, it is together with the main decorative body. The link member is pulled in the moving direction of the main decorative body by the sub-decorative body that moves to, and one end of the link member slides with respect to the unit base. Since one end of the link member is slidable within a range shorter than the movement distance of the main decoration, one end of the link member slides before the main decoration reaches the appearance position. You will reach the end of the direction. Then, when one end of the link member reaches the end in the slide direction and then the main decorative body further moves in the direction of the appearance position, one end of the link member further moves in the direction of the appearance position. Therefore, the link member pulls the sub-decorative body that tries to move together with the main decorative body toward the unit base side, and this force changes the position of the sub-decorative body with respect to the main decorative body, and the sub-decorative body is changed. Will move from the first position to the second position.

Therefore, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies remain in the first position until one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction. When the main decoration moves together with the main decoration in the state and one end of the link member reaches the end in the sliding direction, the main decoration moves in the direction of the appearance position and a plurality of sub decorations move from the first position. It will move to the second position and spread around the main decorative body, and it is possible to show the player a movable effect that moves in two stages by the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies, so the drive motor can be appropriately used. By controlling, it is possible to stop the movement (directing) in the first stage or move (directing) to the second stage, and it is possible to move (directing) using the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies. The variation can be increased, the player can be entertained by various effects, the player can be less likely to get bored, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In detail, when the main decoration is moved to the first stage, the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations move in the direction of the appearance position in the normal state, so something is done to the player. It can make you think that there is something good and entertain the player. Then, until the second stage, that is, when the main decoration is moved to the appearance position, a plurality of sub-decorations spread around the main decoration, and the main decoration and the plurality of sub-decorations play a large decoration. Since it can be shown to a person, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game and to make the player feel better. It is possible to make it hard to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, since the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved to the second position while the main decorative body is moving to the appearance position, the movement speed of the main decorative body is increased. Since the speed at which the sub-decorative body moves to the second position is relatively fast, it is possible to make the movement as if multiple sub-decorative bodies suddenly spread around the main decorative body, which surprises the player and makes the main decoration. You can enjoy the production using the body and multiple sub-decorative bodies.

Further, as described above, after the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position to some extent, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position. That is, since the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the front view game area to the center side to some extent, and then moved from the first position to the second position so as to spread around the main decorative body. When the plurality of sub-decorative bodies move to the second position, the sub-decorative body can be made difficult to come into contact with other members, and the sub-decorative body and other members can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, as described above, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movements of the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies can be changed in two stages. It is possible to make the player recognize that the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player is different between the time when the player stops in the first stage and the time when the player stops in the second stage. It can be suggested that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and various expected values can be displayed to the player in the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies.

Means 5: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 4.
"The sub-decorative body is
It is characterized in that it is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body. "

According to the configuration of the means 5, a plurality of sub-decorative bodies are rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body.

As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the first position to the second position, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies rotate around the main decorative body. By moving in such a way, it is possible to show the player a movable effect in which a fan is spread by a plurality of sub-decorative bodies. In addition, by moving the plurality of sub-decorative bodies from the first position to the second position, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are arranged radially around the main decorative body, and the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are arranged in a radial pattern. It is possible to show the player a decoration that spreads out in a large radial pattern with the body. In this way, by performing the effect using the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained, and the player can be given an impression of spreading. It is possible to make people think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 6: In any one of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 5.
"A pair of the sub-decorative bodies arranged on both sides of the main decorative body, and
It has a pair of sub-decorative bodies that are connected to each other and has a connecting member attached to the rear side of the main decorative body.
When the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position, the sub-decorative bodies on both sides of the main decorative body move from the first position where the sub-decorative bodies are overlapped with each other in the front view and overlap each other. It is characterized by having a plurality of sub-decorative body units that move to the second position, which has been eliminated. "

Here, examples of the "both sides" with the main decorative body in between include "left and right sides", "upper and lower sides", "diagonal sides", and the like.

In addition, the "connecting members" attached to the main decorative body include "those that are rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body" and "sliding in the vertical direction". "Things that are attached to the wall", "Things that are slidably mounted in the left-right direction", and the like.

Further, the "sub-decorative body unit" includes "a pair of sub-decorative bodies connected by connecting members having different positions in the front-rear direction" and "a pair of sub-decorative bodies connected by connecting members". The body has the same position in the front-back direction. "

According to the configuration of the means 6, a pair of sub-decorative bodies arranged on both sides of the main decorative body and a pair of sub-decorative bodies are connected to each other in the gaming machine, and the pair of sub-decorative bodies are connected to each other on the rear side of the main decorative body. When the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position with the attached connecting member, the sub-decorative bodies on both sides of the main decorative body are overlapped with each other in the front view from the first position. It is provided with a plurality of sub-decorative body units that move to each other and move to a second position where the overlap is eliminated.

As a result, in the normal state where the main decorative body is located in the retracted position, the sub-decorative bodies are visible on both sides of the main decorative body. In this normal state, when the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, the plurality of sub-decorative bodies that overlap each other on both sides of the main decorative body move to the second position, respectively. As a result, the overlap between the two is eliminated and the main decorative body is spread around the main decorative body, so that a large decoration can be shown to the player by the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies. Can be played. When a plurality of sub-decorative bodies move from the first position to the second position, a pair of sub-decorative bodies sandwiched between the main decorative bodies are connected by a connecting member to form one sub-decorative body unit. Therefore, since a pair of sub-decorative bodies can be moved by moving the connecting member, half the number of sub-decorative bodies (connecting member) is compared with the case where all the number of sub-decorative bodies are moved respectively. ) Shall be moved, and the configuration related to the movement of the sub-decorative body can be made a simple configuration, and it is possible to easily embody a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned action and effect.

Means 7: In the configuration of means 6,
"The sub-decorative unit is
The connecting member is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body. "

According to the configuration of the means 7, the connecting member of the sub-decorative body unit is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body.

As a result, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the gaming state, the plurality of sub-decorative body units extend back and forth around the center of the main decorative body via the connecting member. Multiple sub-decorative bodies that were located in the first position on both sides of the main decorative body and overlapped back and forth by rotating around the axis, respectively, rotate around the main decorative body so that the overlap is eliminated. Since it moves to the second position, it is possible to show the player a movable effect that the fan spreads by multiple sub-decorative bodies, and the player can see the decoration that spreads greatly radially between the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies. In addition to being able to show, it is possible to give the player an impression of spreading and make them think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise expectations for the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Means 8: In any of the configurations from Means 1 to Means 7.
"A plurality of main light emitting means attached to the rear side of the main decorative body and capable of irradiating light toward the front, and
Each of the plurality of sub-decorative bodies is attached to the rear side thereof, and is further provided with a plurality of sub-light emitting means capable of irradiating light toward the front. "

Here, as the "main light emitting means" and "sub light emitting means", "monochromatic LED", "full color LED", "high brightness LED", "organic EL", "incandescent bulb", "neon bulb", "cold" "Cathode tube", etc. may be mentioned.

According to the configuration of the means 8, the gaming machine is attached to a plurality of main light emitting means which are attached to the rear side of the main decorative body and can irradiate light toward the front, and are attached to the rear side of the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, respectively. It is further provided with a plurality of sub-light emitting means capable of irradiating light toward the front.

As a result, when the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means are made to emit light, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can be independently light-emitting and decorated. , The main decorative body and the sub-decorative body can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decorative body and the like. Therefore, before the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are luminescently decorated by the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means. Since the player can be made to pay attention to the main decorative body or the like, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the main decorative body or the like is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, and the player is entertained. be able to. And when the drive motor moves the main decoration to the appearance position on the center side of the game area and multiple sub-decorations spread around the main decoration, there is nothing good that surprises the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. When the main decorative body is moved to the appearance position on the center side, if the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are luminescently decorated by the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means, the decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area is played. Since it can be shown to a person, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous occurs, and raise the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Means 9: In a gaming machine
"The game area where the game is played and
A frame-shaped front component that partitions the outer circumference of the game area, and
A flat plate-shaped game panel attached to the rear side of the front component and partitioning the rear end of the game area,
The unit base attached to the game panel and
It is attached to the unit base so as to be vertically movable and visible from the front between the retracted position near the upper edge and the appearance position near the center in the front view, and a predetermined decoration is formed. With the main decoration
A pair of sub-decorative bodies arranged on the left and right sides of the main decorative body to form a predetermined decoration, and a pair of sub-decorative bodies connected to each other and centered on the center of the main decorative body. Two sub-decorative unit units each having a connecting member, which is rotatably attached to the main decorative body around an axis extending back and forth.
A drive that is attached to the unit base and moves the main decorative body in the vertical direction between the retracted position and the appearance position according to a gaming state that changes as a game is played in the gaming area. With the motor
One end is rotatable on both the left and right sides of the unit base with respect to the main decorative body, and is slidably attached in the vertical direction within a range shorter than the movement distance of the main decorative body, and the other. One of the two sub-decorative units is rotatably attached to the sub-decorative body on the left side and the rest is rotatably attached to the sub-decorative body on the right side. When moved to the appearance position, the sub-decorative bodies on the left and right sides sandwiching the main decorative body rotate in different directions from the first position where the sub-decorative bodies overlap each other in the front view, and the overlap is eliminated. Two rod-shaped link members to move to the position,
A plurality of main light emitting means mounted on the rear side of the main decorative body and capable of irradiating light toward the front,
A plurality of sub-light emitting means, which are attached to the rear side of each of the plurality of sub-decorative bodies and can irradiate light toward the front, and a plurality of sub-light emitting means.
It is arranged in the center of the gaming area in front view behind the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, and is provided with an effect display means capable of displaying an effect image. " It is a feature.

According to the configuration of the means 9, the gaming machine is attached to a gaming area where a game is played, a frame-shaped front component that divides the outer periphery of the game area, and a rear side of the front component, and is attached to the game area. Between the flat plate-shaped game panel that divides the rear end, the unit base attached to the game panel, and the retracted position near the upper edge and the appearance position near the center in the front view game area on the unit base. It is mounted so that it can be moved up and down and can be seen from the front, and it is arranged on both the left and right sides of the main decorative body with the predetermined decoration and the predetermined decoration is formed. A pair of sub-decorative bodies, and a connecting member that connects the pair of sub-decorative bodies to each other and is rotatably attached to the main decorative body around an axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body. It is attached to the two sub-decorative body units that each have, and the main decorative body is set to the retracted position and the appearance position according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area. A drive motor that moves up and down between the two, and one end can rotate on both the left and right sides of the main decoration on the unit base, and slides up and down within a range shorter than the movement distance of the main decoration. The main decoration is rotatably mounted, with the other end rotatably attached to one of the two sub-decorative units on the left sub-decorative body and the rest on the right sub-decorative body. When is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position, the sub-decorative bodies on both the left and right sides of the main decorative body are rotated in different directions from the first position where the sub-decorative bodies are overlapped with each other in the front view, and the overlap is eliminated. Two rod-shaped link members that move to two positions, a plurality of main light emitting means that are attached to the rear side of the main decoration and can irradiate light toward the front, and a rear side of a plurality of sub decorations. Each of them is attached to a plurality of sub-light emitting means capable of irradiating light toward the front, and is arranged in the center of the front view game area behind the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies. It is provided with an effect display means capable of displaying.

As a result, under normal conditions, the main decorative body is located in the retracted position near the upper edge in the front view gaming area, and each pair of sub-decorative bodies of the two sub-decorative body units is the main decorative body. Since it is located in the first position where two each on the left and right sides overlap each other in the front and back, the main decoration can be seen near the periphery in the front view game area, and one sub on each side of the main decoration. The decorative body can be seen, and the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative bodies decorate the inside of the gaming area to improve the appearance of the gaming machine. Under normal conditions, the two sub-decorative bodies located in the first position overlap each other in the front and back, so only the front sub-decorative body can be seen from the front (player side), so the posterior side. It is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the sub-decorative body of, and it is possible to recognize that the main decorative body and the sub-decorative body are only the number currently visible. When the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means are made to emit light in a normal state, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub decorative bodies can be made to emit light and be decorated. The decorative body and the sub-decorative body can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decorative body and the like. Further, in the normal state, since the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative body units are in the retracted position near the upper edge of the front view game area, the effect display is arranged in the center of the front view game area. The staging image displayed on the means is not obstructed by the main decorative body or the like, and the staging image can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, and the staging image can be entertained by the player.

In this normal state, when the drive motor is driven according to the game state that changes due to the game being played in the game area and the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the lower appearance position, the main decoration is used. The body and the two sub-decorative units move (descend) together. At this time, the left side of the main decorative body is on the sub-decorative body of one sub-decorative body unit, and the right side of the main decorative body is on the sub-decorative body of the remaining sub-decorative body unit. The ends (lower ends) are attached to each, and one end (upper end) of each of the left and right link members is attached to the unit base so that it can slide in the same vertical direction as the movement direction of the main decorative body. Therefore, the two sub-decorative body units (sub-decorative bodies) that descend together with the main decorative body pull the left and right link members downward in the same direction as the main decorative body moves, and the upper end of the link member is the unit. It will slide against the base. Since the upper ends of the left and right link members can slide up and down within a range shorter than the movement distance (elevation distance) of the main decoration, the left and right are left and right before the main decoration reaches the appearance position. The upper end of each of the link members reaches the lower end in the sliding direction. Then, when the upper end of the link member reaches the lower end in the slide direction and then the main decorative body moves in the direction of the lower appearance position, the lower end of the link member moves further in the direction of the appearance position (downward). Therefore, one of the two sub-decorative bodies in the two sub-decorative body units that try to move together with the main decorative body by the left and right link members is pulled toward the unit base side by this force. The two sub-decorative units rotate in different directions with respect to the axis extending back and forth around the center of the main decorative body, and the overlap between the front and back is eliminated from the first position where they overlap each other. It will move to the position. As a result, the sub-decorative bodies that were visible as one on both the left and right sides of the main decorative body became two and rotated so that the fan spreads, and extended radially around the main decorative body and the main decorative body. One large decoration can be formed with two sub-decorative bodies and shown to the player. Therefore, since all the number of sub-decorative bodies will appear around the main decorative body that has moved to the center of the game area, the player's surprise can be surprised by increasing the number of sub-decorative bodies, and the main By expanding a plurality of sub-decorative bodies around the decorative body, the overall decoration can be enlarged, which can give a strong impact to the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, when the main decorative body is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, both the left and right sides of the main decorative body are reached until the upper end portions of the left and right link members reach the lower end portions in the sliding direction. When the two sub-decorative bodies move together with the main decorative body in the state where they overlap each other in the first position and the upper end portion of the link member reaches the lower end portion in the sliding direction, the main decorative body moves in the direction of the appearance position ( While moving downward), the two sub-decorative bodies on the left and right rotate from the first position to the second position where the overlap is eliminated, and spread radially around the main decorative body, and the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative bodies Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect that moves in two stages depending on the body unit, by appropriately controlling the drive motor, the movement (effect) can be stopped in the first stage or moved to the second stage (movement to the second stage). It is possible to make it (direct), and it is possible to increase the variation of movable production using the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies, and it is possible to entertain the player with various productions and also to entertain the player. It is possible to make it difficult to get bored, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the main decorative body can be moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the game state, the main decorative body changes when the game state changes in the normal state of the retracted position. Depending on whether or not the player descends to the appearance position, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained. Then, when the main decorative body is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position side by the drive motor and moved to the first stage where the sub-decorative body does not rotate and move, the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative body units are in a normal state. By moving downward as it is, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and to have a sense of expectation for the game. Furthermore, until the second stage, that is, when the main decoration is lowered to the appearance position, four sub-decorations radiate around the main decoration, and the main decoration and the four sub-decorations make a large decoration. Can be shown to the player, and the main decorative body and the four sub-decorative bodies can be lowered to make the player feel as if a bulletin board from heaven is given to the player. It is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur, raise the expectation for the game, and make it difficult for the player to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

In this way, when the main decorative body is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movements of the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies can be changed in two stages, so that the player can take the first step. It is possible to make the player recognize that the possibility (expected value) of the advantageous gaming state that is advantageous is different between the time when the player stops at the first stage and the time when the player stops at the second stage. However, it can be suggested that the expected value is higher in the second stage, and various expected values can be displayed to the player in the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies.

In addition, the main decorative body is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area, and by lowering the main decorative body to the appearance position, it becomes easier to secure a space around the main decorative body. The four sub-decorative bodies can be moved from the first position to the second position and spread radially around the main decorative body in the spawn position, and the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative body units are as large as possible. The decoration can be formed. Therefore, when the main decorative body is lowered to the appearance position by the drive motor according to the game state, a large decoration by the main decorative body and the four sub-decorative bodies radially spread around the main decorative body is played in the vicinity of the center of the game area. Since it can be shown to the player, it can surprise the player, attract the player's attention to the center of the game area, and make a large decoration with the main decoration and the four sub decorations. It can be entertained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, when the main decorative body is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the two sub-decorative bodies on the left and right sides of the main decorative body are moved from the first position to the second position, and one drive is provided. Since the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative body units are moved by a motor, one drive motor is used when performing an effect (movable effect) using the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative body units. It is only necessary to control only, and the load applied to the production can be reduced. Therefore, when performing an effect using the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative body units, even if the effect using other movable decorative objects, light emitting decorative objects, etc. is performed at the same time, the load on the control of the effect increases. It is possible to prevent the movement of the main decoration and multiple sub-decorations from being jerky due to the drive motor due to the unstable control of the staging due to the overload. It is possible to make a gaming machine that exerts the above-mentioned action effect by surely exerting the effect of the effect using the two sub-decorative body units.

Further, as described above, since the two sub-decorative bodies on the left and right sides of the main decorative body are moved to the second position while the main decorative body is descending to the appearance position, the main decorative body is moved. Since the speed at which the sub-decorative body moves to the second position is relatively faster than the moving speed of the four sub-decorative bodies, it is possible to make the movement as if the four sub-decorative bodies suddenly spread around the main decorative body. It is possible to surprise the player and entertain the production using the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative body units.

Further, as described above, after the main decorative body moves from the retracted position to the appearance position to some extent, the sub-decorative bodies on the left and right sides of the main decorative body are moved from the first position to the second position. .. In other words, the sub-decorative body is moved from the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the front view game area to the center side to some extent, and then moved from the first position to the second position so as to spread radially around the main decorative body. , When the four sub-decorative bodies move to the second position, the sub-decorative body can be made difficult to come into contact with other members, and the sub-decorative body and other members can be prevented from being damaged.

Further, when the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub light emitting means are made to emit light, the main decorative body and the four sub-decorative bodies can be independently light-emitting and decorated. The main decorative body and the sub-decorative body can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the main decorative body and the like. Therefore, before the main decorative body and the two sub-decorative body units are moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the sub-decorative bodies on both the left and right sides are light-emitting decorated by the main light emitting means and the plurality of sub-light emitting means. By letting the player pay attention to the main decorative body, etc., the player can be thrilled and thrilled depending on whether or not the main decorative body, etc. is moved to the appearance position by the drive motor, and the player can be excited. Can be entertained. Then, when the main decorative body is lowered to the appearance position on the central side of the game area by the drive motor and the four sub-decorative bodies are radially spread around the main decorative body, there is something good that surprises the player. It is possible to make the player think that it is not, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game. When the main decorative body is lowered to the appearance position, if the main decorative body and the four sub-decorative bodies are luminescently decorated by the main light emitting means and a plurality of sub light emitting means, the player is shown a decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") that the player has an advantage occurs, and raise the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state. The decrease can be suppressed.

In addition, since the staging display means is arranged in the center of the front view game area, when the main decorative body is lowered to the central appearance position in the game area by the drive motor, the main decorative body and the two sub-decorations are displayed. Since (a part of) the staging image is blocked by the body unit, the player can notice the descent of the main decorative body, etc. and pay attention to it, and move from the first position to the second position around the main decorative body. You can show four sub-decorative bodies that spread radially at. Therefore, in the center of the gaming area, a large decoration by the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies can be surely shown to the player, and the gaming machine can surely exhibit the above-mentioned action and effect.

Means 10: In any one of the configurations from means 1 to means 9.
The gaming machine is
The game area where the game medium is driven by the operation of the player,
A reception port that is arranged in a plurality of areas in the game area and can accept game media, and
It is a pachinko machine provided with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the game media into the reception port.

Here, as the "reception entrance", "a general winning opening that is always open in the game area" and "an advantageous gaming state that is always open in the game area and is advantageous to the player by accepting the game medium". "Starting winning opening (starting opening)" where a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate Variable winning openings that can be accepted (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) "," Ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game medium passes through a specific area (gate, through chucker, etc.) in the game area. Depending on the result, the game medium can enter a specific area (for example, a gate, chucker, etc.) in the game area, such as "variable winning openings (variable starting openings, accessory winning openings, etc.) that can accept the game medium". Depending on the result of the normal lottery that is drawn by passing, the game medium can be accepted, and a special lottery is performed to determine whether or not the acceptance of the game medium causes an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. "Winning opening (variable starting opening)", "V winning opening that generates an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous when the game medium accepted in the accessory winning opening is sorted and accepted by the distribution means", " Examples of the advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous include a large winning opening and a character winning opening that can be opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to accept the game medium.

Further, as the "pachinko machine", "a lottery means for performing a special lottery for generating an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and a special lottery result drawn by the lottery means". The special lottery result display means for displaying the special lottery result by lottery by the combination of the stop-displayed special symbols and the special lottery result display means for displaying the advantageous gaming state in the special lottery result display means. When the result of the special lottery to be generated is displayed, the large winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern to generate an advantageous gaming state. When the distribution means for distributing the game medium received in the mouth and the game medium distributed by the distribution means are received in the V winning opening, the accessory winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, which is advantageous for the player. It is equipped with an advantageous gaming state generating means for generating an advantageous gaming state (so-called honey machine), and has a large winning opening and an accessory winning opening, and is drawn by accepting the game medium to the starting opening. Depending on the result of the special lottery, the large winning opening or the special winning opening is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern, and when the game medium accepted in the special winning opening is distributed to the V winning opening, the special winning opening or the large winning opening is designated. A device provided with an advantageous gaming state generating means (so-called multifunction device) that opens and closes in the pattern of the above to generate an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and the like.

According to the configuration of the means 10, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged in the gaming area in which the gaming medium is driven by the operation of the player, and the receiving / receiving entrance where the gaming medium can be received, and the game to the receiving entrance. It is a pachinko machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to the acceptance of the media. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

It is desirable that the effect of moving the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies by the drive motor (movable effect) is executed by receiving the game medium driven into the game area into the reception port. As a result, when the game medium is received at the reception entrance, a predetermined number of game media are paid out, and the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies are moved to entertain the player. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the continuous driving of the game medium aimed at the entrance, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

In addition, a special lottery is performed to generate an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous by accepting the game medium to the starting port, and the result of the special lottery is presented to the player when the result is suggested to the player. As one of the effects to be performed, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies may be moved by a drive motor. As a result, by moving the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player due to the above-mentioned action and effect. The lottery result can make the player think that an advantageous gaming state occurs (for example, "big hit"), which raises the expectation for the occurrence of the advantageous gaming state and suppresses the decline in interest. Can be made to. Further, as described above, by moving the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, it is possible to show the player a movable effect having a higher effect effect, so that the player is suggested to the special lottery result of the lottery. It can be suitably used for a staging (for example, a reach staging) to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest.

Means 11: In any one of the configurations from means 1 to means 9.
The gaming machine is
Multiple fuselage bodies, each with multiple symbols,
A start operation unit that rotates a plurality of the rotating fuselage bodies by being operated by the player after the game medium is inserted, and
A plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating fuselage, and
A slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media according to a combination of stop symbols by all the rotating fuselage that has been rotated and stopped by a player operating a plurality of the stop operation units. It is characterized by being.

Here, the "slot machine" includes "a machine in which the number of effective lines for determining the combination of stop symbols changes according to the number of game media (medals) used in one game" and "a plurality of rotating fuselage". An internal lottery is executed at the start of rotation, and a privilege that gives the player an advantage according to the combination of the stopped symbols and the result of the drawn internal lottery is given. "," The effective line for determining the combination of the stopped symbols is fixed. It has been done ", etc. The "privileges" include "Big Bonus (BB)", "Regular Bonus (RB)", "Cherry Rush Bonus (CRB)", "Replay", "Long Replay Time (LRT)", and "Assist Time (Assist Time). AT) ”, etc.

According to the configuration of the means 11, the gaming machine is operated by a plurality of rotating bodies each having a plurality of symbols and a player after the gaming medium is loaded, so that the starting operation unit rotates the plurality of rotating bodies. And, according to the combination of a plurality of stop operation units for stopping the rotation of each of the plurality of rotating cylinders and a stop symbol by all the rotating cylinders whose rotation is stopped by the player operating the plurality of stop operation units respectively. It is a slot machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a predetermined number of game media. Thereby, in the pachi-slot machine, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

For the effect of moving the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies by the drive motor (movable effect), the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols. As one of the effects presented to the player during the time (so-called reach), the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies may be moved by the drive motor. As a result, the movement of the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies can strongly attract the interest of the player, and the operation of the stop operation unit can be enjoyed so as to be a winning combination. Further, when the lottery result of the internal lottery is a winning combination, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies may be moved by a drive motor, whereby the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies can be moved. By moving, a strong impact can be given to the player, so if the player is stopped at a specific combination of symbols, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs (for example, "BB"). It can be reminded, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in interest. Further, as described above, by moving the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies, it is possible to show the player a movable effect having a higher effect effect, so that the player is suggested to the drawn internal lottery. It can be suitably used for the production for the purpose, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Means 12: In any one of the configurations from means 1 to means 9.
The gaming machine is
It is characterized by being a fusion machine that combines a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine.

Here, the "fusion machine", which is a fusion of a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine, is a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols according to the operation of a starting operation unit (for example, an operation lever) after a plurality of game media are loaded. Is displayed in a variable manner, and then the fluctuation of the symbol sequence is stopped according to the operation of the stop operation unit (for example, the stop button), the game medium is paid out according to the combination of the stopped symbols, and a privilege advantageous to the player (for example). , Advantageous gaming state). If the stop operation unit is not operated even after the lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the symbol string may be stopped according to the lapse of the predetermined time.

According to the configuration of the means 12, the gaming machine is a fusion machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Thereby, in the fusion machine in which the pachinko machine and the pachislot machine are fused, any of the above-mentioned means can be exerted.

For the effect of moving the main decorative body and multiple sub-decorative bodies by the drive motor (movable effect), the combination of symbols that are stopped rotating except for one on the effective line satisfies the combination of winning combination symbols. As one of the effects to be presented to the player at the time of doing (so-called reach), the main decorative body and a plurality of sub-decorative bodies may be moved by a drive motor, or an internal lottery may be performed. When the lottery result is a winning combination, the main decorative body and the plurality of sub-decorative bodies may be moved by a drive motor, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the raised position. be. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back after being disassembled into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 99) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4 and the main body are formed by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame and the hinge member 60 below the outer frame. The hinge under-frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is mounted so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side when viewed from the front.

Further, in the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to be a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated to the front, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 having a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The hinge member 510 above the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame for attaching the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame base unit 500, and the game. A ball launching device 540 for driving a game ball B into the game area 5a of the board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a game received by the payout base unit 550. Covers the payout unit 560 for paying out the ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is openably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side and divides the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 that is attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 that is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the cage main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the periphery arranged behind the game panel 1100. The control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, the front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface of the game panel 1100, and the rear surface of the game panel 1100. It is equipped with a back unit 3000 that can be attached to. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second major winning opening 2006, which give out a predetermined number of game balls B). It is equipped with. Obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

A player can drive the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B becomes a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first large winning opening 2005, a second large winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

Further, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600, or displays the table effect unit 2600 and the lower movable effect according to the game state that changes by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a. The player can be entertained by performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, or the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame having a front view extending vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated to the front.

In the outer frame 2, the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame can detachably support the hinge member 510 on the main body frame of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side of the front view as the center.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, respectively, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction, and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 is increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to the outside. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, in the outer frame right assembly 20, the outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a certain width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It is provided with a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an aluminum alloy extruded mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the left side surface that is opposite to the concave portion 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 is increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper-horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. It is provided with a pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, the screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b to be attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the left from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and in a state where the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a is aligned with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the notch portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook hook member 24 and the lower hook hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a certain width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. A flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 can be inserted through the hook piece portion 25b in the front-rear direction. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is mounted on the mounting step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling it. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 has an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the outer frame lower member 41 and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed on the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. It is equipped with a mechanism 44.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 is provided with a notch 41a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating up and down at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends in a state of being inserted respectively. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and has a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and is removed from the position toward the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as wide as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate rear member 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. It forms a space 40a. The curtain plate front member 42 has an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates back and forth and extends left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface moves backward. It is provided with a portion 44e.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool comes into contact with the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it comes into contact with the forward protruding upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. When the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or on the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a across the grill member 46 and extend back and forth. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided with a locking member 52 and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a that is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 described later of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 has a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b behind the bearing groove 51c by the mounting screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock main body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space that can accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the inside of the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 under the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion posterior to the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. It is provided with a hinge pin 60c under the outer frame protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d having a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through the horizontal portion 60a up and down. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is columnar and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the member 43 behind the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed. Since the space between the cloaca and the cloaca is gradually narrowed, the cloaca is rolled to the rear side where the distance is wide, and the cloaca can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a front view extending vertically, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a that is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates back and forth, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. The rear handle relay board 106, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 are covered from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game to be driven into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed, and the game board attached to the main body frame 4 is closed. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular and flat door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and a handle mounting member 102. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the rear view of the board 104, and the rear handle relay board mounted on the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached above the relay board 106 after the handle on the rear side of the door frame base 101. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The cylinder lock 130 is recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, and penetrates back and forth between the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted and the insertion recess 101c. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the ball passage port 101g for the upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. The speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is rearward. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1b. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire axial length of the cylinder portion 102a and are arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylinder portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three protrusions 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1c. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the cylindrical portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. It can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side) of the pachinko machine 1 through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211.

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1d. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the lower right corner of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the outer shape of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is the handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, the door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and the side of the door frame right side unit 410. The purpose is to relay the connection between the decorative board 413 of the decorative portion in the window, the decorative board 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the handle rear relay board 106 is covered with the handle rear relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1e. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay board (a portion extending up and down in an inverted L shape) are rear. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and has a wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed near the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1f. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the vertically extending left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112 with the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and hooks 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 are hooked. The hooking member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. The tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends to the left and right in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a which is notched downward from the upper end in the vicinity of the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b which penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the right end. The notch 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear pieces that are formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces that face each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a rear piece on the left side mounted on the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a rear piece on the right side mounted on the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the portion of the insertion hole penetrating the front and rear on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched out metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled so as to be along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is provided. , Is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the notch 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1 g. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a rectangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. In the state where the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of the pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the flange member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b by a predetermined amount.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged and rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1h. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a square flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 is located coaxially with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 in the protruding piece 125b in a state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1i. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular columnar cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131 and inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 is inserted into the pair of notches to rotate. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to be rotated.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1j. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. be. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A game ball that has entered from the entrance 141a of the box-shaped front cover 141 that is open and the front cover 141 that is open in the front and rear while closing the rear end of the front cover 141. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. The rear cover 142 one by one a ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is equipped with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arcuate slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing rear unit 240 And the portion of the ball ejection taxiway 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144, which is below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball ejection port 141b and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The actuating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The actuating rod 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance entrance 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation, and a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position and the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the advance entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a and stays on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end portion of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energization) of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 that swings in the vertical direction. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation rod 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends to the left and right, and the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 is rotatably attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 around an axis extending back and forth. Has been done. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a of the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation rod 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be engageable with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146, and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35 (b)) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 is in a state where the ball feeding operating rod 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the supply position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 117) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 operated by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned and partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b under the normal state, and is on the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation rod 143c slides downward as the operation transmission unit moves downward. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 on which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It is possible to prevent it from bouncing off at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner of the ball feeding port 142a in the rear cover 142 when viewed from the rear. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece portion 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end of the front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that widens toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when an illegal act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the ball, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1k. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is discharged from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and the front side open, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and communicates with the normal taxiway of the lower full tank path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit, and the through ball passage 150a. The through-ball passage 150a is provided with a full-tan ball receiving port 150b that opens rearward on the lower right side of the front view and can communicate with the full-tan taxiway of the lower full-tan ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 opened upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and did not reach the game area 5a even though it was fired by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 150c that receives a game ball B (foul ball), and a game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the dish unit.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b, the foul ball receiving port 150c, and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower ends are rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the person in charge of the game hall, or the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the full tank of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The actuating protrusion 613a of the 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f that can be contacted (see FIG. 91). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the actuating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the downstream end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It is provided with a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 is a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 97). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 97).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outer sides of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To mount the glass unit 160 on the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit mounting member 163 mounted on the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base 163a. do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by the reverse procedure of the above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged so as to be separated from each other to the left and right by a flat plate-shaped main body portion 171 having a predetermined outer periphery and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body portion 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body portion 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, which will be described later, an out guide portion 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the crime prevention cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (game ball B launched by the ball launcher 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having multiple LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative board 184. The handle cover 185, which is attached to the cover pedestal 183, is provided.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front surface of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is viewed clockwise through the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urging in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and the tip side of the handle unit 180 protrudes outward from the left side of the front outer peripheral surface of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from a cylindrical base 181a extending back and forth, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and an outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c can be inserted into the three groove portions 181c, respectively. By being inserted, the handle base 181 becomes in a state where it cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f and the like.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a has a side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182, which bulges outward so as to bulge outward, and is the opposite side of the anti-city area. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape of the first protrusion 182a and is formed in a shape similar to that of the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed into a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is rounded forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is decorated with light emission by appropriately causing the LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184 to emit light.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 is attached. The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without any discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The steering wheel touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the steering wheel unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the steering wheel 182 or the like, the static electricity acting from the player is detected and the static electricity acting on the steering wheel 182 or the like of the player is detected. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of the 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original method to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 determines. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is almost the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue of the player and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged under the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201, a plate base unit 210 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the lower plate main body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the lower plate main body 251 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the staging operation unit 300 is attached to the staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the staging operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the staging operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibration speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the staging operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the staging operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the staging operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 has a ball lending operation unit 220 arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5a. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. Guidance passage portion 201a (FIG. 46). See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is submerged below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically through the bottom wall so that the game ball B can be discharged. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed so as to be openable and closable by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lower toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the staging operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5c. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the staging operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 at the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protruding forward, and the mounting base 213 mounted on the front side of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the plate base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 240, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230, is provided.

[3-5c-1. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. The speaker port 211b to which the punching metal is attached on the front side, the lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side with respect to the center of the left and right sides of the front view and extends to the rear in a tubular shape, and the lower plate. A notch 211d cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion extending in a tubular shape to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is mounted and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth under the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted, and at the lower right corner of the front view. Cylinder insertion through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted and the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 which penetrates back and forth near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the cylindrical rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball removal guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball removal unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the cylindrically extending portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the dish ball is pulled out, the dish is discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 211c into the lower dish 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball pulling guide path 241c of the unit 240, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied to the ball feeding guide path 241b from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed.

[3-5c-2. Precision plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 is retracted backward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part near the right end is closed is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, a staging operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper part, and a part of the staging operation unit 300 is mounted on the staging operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5c-3. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 is provided with an insertion port 213a penetrating vertically near the left end and a through port 213b penetrating vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball removal unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, the through port 213b is inserted with a wiring cable for connecting the ball rental operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104.

[3-5c-4. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish lower left decorative board 283, and the dish lower right decorative board 288. , And to relay the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5c-5. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be rented into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of cash and prepaid cards that were put into the rented game ball B and return them.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has transparency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball removal button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine is returned after deducting the amount of the rented game ball B. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5c-6. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball removal unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231 and a front that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231 in the vertical direction. The slider 232 and the like are provided. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends up and down, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removal button 222, and the lower end is the actuating receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball removal. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 mounted so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It is equipped with.

The rear base 241 protrudes upward from the portion where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward, so that the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass can be used. A game from a position below the ball feeding taxiway 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding taxiway 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a taxiway 241c for guiding the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c protrudes to the right of the rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side of the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the ball removal taxiway 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and protrudes rearward from the actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and the rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. The operation transmission unit 242b and the like are provided. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the actuating receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241 and operates on the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface of the ball pulling member 143. The rod 143c is in contact with it.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242 to urge the upper plate ball removal slider 242 upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball removal button 222 is positioned upward at the moving end via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a. Further, since the countersunk ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball ejection button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launcher 540 side via the entrance entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that is open below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball ejection port 141b is guided into the lower plate ball supply port 211c from the notch portion 211d through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the working rod 143c in contact with the working transmission portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5d. Dish decoration unit]
The plate decoration unit 250 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. be. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the staging operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively, separated from each other to the left and right. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5d-1. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 cooperates with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 to form the lower plate 202. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate body 251 is attached to a portion on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in which the shape in a plan view extends to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating up and down in the vicinity of the front end of the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5d-2. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed in front of each of them. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so as to become wider in the vertical direction toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 has a front notch portion 252e cut upward from the lower front end of the portion covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and the lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched in a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. It is formed between the cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and the pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with a staging operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The staging operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to completely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5d-3. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It is provided with a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically located at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole is formed through. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with a slit extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 is It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e in the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In the normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 backward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 moves backward with the left end side as the center. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 located directly above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball removal button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in the open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state of matching the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is rotated so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5d-4. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical, left-right extending dish upper left decorative body 271 and a dish upper left reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is equipped with a dish upper left decorative board 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end and the central axis extending left and right at the right end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed to be milky white.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper left decorative body 271, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be luminescently decorated.

In the state where the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the staging operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the plate upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the plate upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decorative unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical, left-right extending dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish upper right decorative body 276 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative board 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular bulging forward, with the central axis extending diagonally to the upper right at the right end and the central axis extending left and right at the left end, forming a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted from the rear inside the dish upper right decorative body 276, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emitting and decorated.

In the state where the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the staging operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the plate upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction in the plate upper right decorative unit 276, when a plurality of LEDs of the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the plate upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5d-5. Lower left decorative unit of the plate and lower right decorative unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the plate unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, respectively. Be done. The lower left plate decoration unit 280 and the lower right plate decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left plate decoration unit 270 and the upper right plate decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the staging operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is equipped with a lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish, which is attached to the rear side of the lower left reflector 282 of the dish and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view, and is on the left side. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate has a semi-arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semi-arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 281 on the lower left of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The left end of the dish lower left decorative unit 280 is located below the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 in the staging operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative unit 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. It can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to look like a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has transparency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate. It includes a reflector 287 and a decorative substrate 288 on the lower right side of the plate, which is attached to the rear side of the reflector 287 on the lower right side of the plate and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semi-arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semi-arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the dish is formed in a milky white color.

The lower right reflector 287 of the dish is inserted from the rear inside the lower right decorative body 286 of the dish, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the dish. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 286 on the lower right of the plate can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting light.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the staging operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 seems to have the right end submerged in the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the longitudinal direction of the lower right decorative unit 286, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate is emitted. The entire front surface of the plate can be decorated with light emission almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5e. Overall configuration of the staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the staging operation unit 300 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the staging operation unit in the dish unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the staging operation button. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The staging operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The staging operation unit 300 includes a staging operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that allows the player to perform a rotation operation, and a pressing operation unit 303 that allows the player to perform a pressing operation. In the staging operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the inner circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the staging operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the staging operation ring 330, and the staging operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and the staging operation ring decorative board 352. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the staging operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5e-1. Production operation unit cover unit]
The staging operation unit cover unit 310 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The staging operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in the shape of a container with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A reflector 313 on the center of the dish mounted from the rear inside the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the reflector 313 on the center of the dish and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315 and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the plate are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side thereof is mounted on the staging operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 from above. It is installed so that it can be placed. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in the shape of a semicircle at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the lower cover 311 of the unit is assembled to the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the shape in a plan view bulges forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is attached to the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. The unit front cover 312 has a semi-circular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-circular shape, and the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the lower plate center upper decorative body 312a forward. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by dividing a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) into half and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in the shape of a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate, respectively. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the front end of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The reflector 313 on the center of the plate blocks the light from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs on the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 316 under the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312b under the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of extending in a semi-arc shape in the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, the dish When the LED of the decorative substrate 314 on the upper center and the LED of the decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be luminescent and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the staging operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the staging operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5e-2. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper portion is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321 and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. It is provided with a portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring, which is open upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body portion 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion on the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 in the staging operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The flange portion 322 has a diameter whose outer circumference substantially coincides with the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring mounting base 331 of the staging operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the staging operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body portion 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5e-3. Direction operation ring]
The staging operation ring 330 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the staging operation ring of the staging operation unit as viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the staging operation ring as viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation ring disassembled and viewed from above, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation ring disassembled and viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the staging operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the staging operation ring 330 is set to about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the 332 and are rotatably mounted around the axis extending vertically on the ring mounting base 331, and the rotation base 332 that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward. It is provided with a restricting ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which constitutes a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is equipped with a ring inner cover 337 and a cover. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The ring mounting base 331 has an outer diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced outward from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down in a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The rotation base 332 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331 and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the staging operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs constituting the outer and upper parts of the circle extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of rings are arranged in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a decorative portion 335b that is provided, and an outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts of a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projects upward and toward the center from the inside and in the circumferential direction. It is provided with an outer lower cover mounting portion 336b and a plurality of arranged portions. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the outer lower cover 336 of the ring is formed in a shape in which an arc in the range of 1/8 of the circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover mounting portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc constituting the inner and upper parts of a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in the range of 1/8 of the circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the staging operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The staging operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the staging operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5e-4. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the staging operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for driving the rotation operation unit 302 of the staging operation ring 330 to rotate and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. A gear cover that rotatably mounts the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed with a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the spacing between the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the staging operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the staging operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled in the staging operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the transmission gear for the operation ring by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, it is possible to assist the player in the rotation operation. Alternatively, by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, a load can be applied to the rotation operation of the player. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling according to the content of the player participation type staging, or to give a click feeling.

[3-5e-5. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the transmission detection of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the staging operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear mounting member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and at the same time, the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5e-6. Direction operation ring decorative board]
The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached below the staging operation ring 330, and the staging operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-lit and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged along the outer circumference on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the staging operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a transparent decorative substrate cover 353 on the upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the staging operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through hole 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring constituting the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be luminescently decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5e-7. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire staging operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. This vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can present a more diverse effect to the player.

[3-5e-8. Direction operation button unit]
The staging operation button unit 360 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation button unit of the staging operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the staging operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the staging operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference and is arranged on the target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is movably attached between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 by a pair of guide shafts 362 in the vertical direction, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted to urge the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urge the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The center button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylinder shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the center button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is equipped with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted and a rise detection sensor 376a is attached to the lower surface. In the staging operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and is moved up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the press detection sensor 381 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is equipped with a descent detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and a lowering detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is attached. In the button unit base 361, the lower end of the leg portion 361b is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and the rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the center shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 is vertically penetrated in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c projecting upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d projecting into the central hole 364b so as to face each other near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably attached around the axis.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting the pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 has a space in which the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c abuts on the upper base 363 to restrict upward movement and the bottom portion 373b of the central button body 373 can move between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by the pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with a descent detection piece 370c, which is notched at two points facing each other and protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape from the descent detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 is provided with a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and project outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and a first cam 371b. The second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, and the third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end opposite to the second cam 371d of the first cam 371b. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts 362 that penetrate the bottom portion 373b so as to be slidable. A pair of guide holes 373c to be inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and a pressure detection sensor protruding downward from the bottom 373b. It is detected by the press detection piece 373e detected by 381, a pair of guide bosses 373f protruding rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and inserted through the button spring 374, and the rising detection sensor 376a protruding upward from the bottom 373b. It is provided with 373 g of an ascending detection piece.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 abuts on the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f abuts on the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The press detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is the elevating base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button main body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaquely. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The ascending detection piece 373g of the central button main body 373 enters the opening provided in the upper base 363 when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central opening 373d) of the central button main body 373 abuts on the lower surface of the upper base 363. Is formed in.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the cylindrical portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative substrate 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can make the central button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. The central button decorative substrate 376 is arranged so that the rise detection sensor 376a is inserted into the opening provided in the upper base 363.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 has an annular board portion 378a that covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364, and the outer peripheral board portion 378 that extends upward from the inner circumference of the board portion 378a in a cylindrical shape. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the cylindrical portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62 (a), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in a state where the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365. It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button main body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the staging operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 is moved downward. The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. In the state where the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height substantially coincided with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward in this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

When the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367 in this descending position, the elevating cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. One cam 371b rolls to the left portion of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 is moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the staging operation unit 300, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the staging operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the center button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. The press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381 because it is separated from the press detection piece 373e.

Further, in this state (state of FIG. 62B), the ascending detection piece 373g of the center button main body 373 is detected by the ascending detection sensor 376a, and it is detected that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the ascending position.

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the center button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 abuts on the button unit base 361 while the center button body 373 abuts on the elevating base 364, the press detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force higher than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 via the outer peripheral button cover 380 raises and lowers the spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The press detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381.

To return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. Roll along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5e-9. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body portion 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the staging operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decorative board 314, a dish center lower decorative board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative substrate 376, outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, press detection sensor 381, ascending detection sensor 376a, and descending detection sensor 382, and the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210. Relaying the connection.

[3-5e-10. Action of staging operation unit]
Next, the operation of the staging operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the staging operation ring and the staging operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the staging operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the dish unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the dish unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The staging operation unit 300 is provided with a staging operation unit 301 on the upper surface thereof, which can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the staging operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the staging operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral board cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the staging operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the staging operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and by repeatedly rotating forward and reverse within a predetermined rotation angle range, the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated and vibrated. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is not only rotated by the operation ring drive motor 342, but can also be rotated by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 separated in the circumferential direction is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. .. Alternatively, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342 to make the rotation operation heavier or give a click feeling.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated while the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the descending position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the staging operation unit 300 includes a staging operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the staging operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by causing the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 to emit light. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the staging operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) descends to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressing is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing is detected. No pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the staging operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the press detection sensor 381 detects the press.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the press detection sensor 381 does not detect the press.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the center pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the staging operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the pressing operation unit 303 may be used as a clue to facilitate the rotation operation, or the pressing operation unit 303 may be an obstacle to the rotation operation. Since the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. The door frame left side decorative board 402 on which multiple LEDs are mounted on the front of the cage, and the left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the front. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately causing a plurality of LEDs to emit light.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semi-arc bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the door frame top decorative body of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of 453.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and makes it appear that a cylindrical fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decorative portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in the game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window decoration portion 410b, and the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414 inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flat plate in the vertical and front-back directions so as to cover the left side surface of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It is provided with a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decorative member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration members 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are considered to be full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decorative portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decorative portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decorative portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a through which the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward are formed.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side outer panel 416, the through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and back and forth, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a variable elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The decorative body 419 on the right side of the door frame is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semi-arc bulging forward extends up and down in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that the portion 1/4 from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated by light emission. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (the end of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without having to move to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make the entire game area 5a difficult for the player to see, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and the attention is paid to other players. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the left and right sides and the front upper portion of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top central decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door. A door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 has a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459 arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. To cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It is provided with a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is located upward. The left and right front protrusions 451b are inclined so as to move backward as the front ends move downward, and are formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely cut out from the rear end toward the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semi-arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker openings 454b facing the top central speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the outer left and right sides of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top center decorative board 455, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, on the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes penetrating back and forth are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top center speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b in the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. The sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. The purpose is to relay the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integrated decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 of the dish unit 200, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a of the effect operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, plate upper right decorative body 276, plate center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the dish upper left decorative body 271 surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, the dish upper right decorative body 276, the dish center upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 consisting of a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large-diameter upper dish center upper decorative body 312a and dish center lower decorative body 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. Door frame left side decorative body 404 of door frame left side unit 400 and door frame right side decorative body of door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of decorative body 312a and dish center lower decorative body 312b. The 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer periphery thereof. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, in the staging operation unit 300, the size increases from the lower end toward the upper side, so that it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since it is easy to understand the whole picture of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, it is possible to make it easy for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player immediately rotates when the player participation type effect is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can entertain the player-participation-type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding forward from the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as the pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and at the same time, pays out the game ball B to the player side or uses the game ball B for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is operably attached to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which is attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2, and the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It is equipped with a three-dimensional 520.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 and the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the game area 5a of the game board 5. A ball launcher 540 for driving a ball B, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the front side and the left side on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 that is openable and closable and is attached to the main body frame base 501, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It also includes a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 is a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. The 552, the tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, the first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and the first rail. The second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. It includes a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guide unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B guided by the ball guide unit 570 based on an instruction from the payout control board 633. The payout device 580 to be paid out one by one, the upper full tank path unit 600 for guiding the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 are placed on the door frame 3 side. Alternatively, it is provided with a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the substrate unit to the 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 has a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is equipped with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 is inserted from the front to the rear into the frame of the outer frame 2, and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the shape of the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. It is provided with a connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth and for holding the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically, and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the range of the height of the game board and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a gaming board regulating section 501d that projects upward from the center in the left-right direction of the gaming board mounting section 501c and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the portion 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h when viewed from the front.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that is rotatably attached and is formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right side of the speaker opening 501g to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size that can accommodate the connection cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the upper and lower sides of the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. In the connection cable guide member 502, the mounting shaft 502c is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide body 502a by being fastened together with the guide body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c at the right end. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the opened door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pressed backward by the connection cable 503. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent problems from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connection cable 503 folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force to close the connection cable 503 is exerted due to the folding habit. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) can be prevented from moving. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is closer to the door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle between the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 122 above the frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k in the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to rotatably attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 is attached. The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and the lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c for the outer frame of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 for the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the main body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending to the right from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also enters the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 (the main body frame 4). It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. It is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launcher 540 is attached to the flat plate-shaped launch base 541 attached to the launcher mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the rear surface of the right portion of the launch base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the hitting mallet 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the hitting mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launcher 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the rear. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending to the left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a width in the front-rear direction extending downward from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction with substantially the same width as the top plate portion. The left side plate portion 551b, the right side plate portion 551c whose width in the front-rear direction from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a, and the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. The upper part of the back plate 551d extending downward to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and extending from the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b to the right with a substantially constant width to the vicinity of the lower end. The left side of the back plate 551e, the inner plate 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side of the back plate 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate 551b, and the front side of the lower side of the left side plate 551b to the right. It includes a bottom plate portion 551g extending to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left side plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided at the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 that is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and is open upward in a box shape that extends to the left and right, and a portion that extends to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending to the left in a groove shape open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is located at the upper end of the tank rail 553, separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the left-right direction and leftward in the front view. The second rail cover 555 that is attached and extends to the left end of the tank rail 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 that is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is formed so that the left-right direction is about half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction. It is formed in the direction. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is attached to the vicinity of the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape extending straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lower, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the guidance passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 555, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is provided at a portion between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555 with respect to the axis around which the end on the first rail cover 554 side extends in the front-rear direction. It is mounted rotatably. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 92). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper stage side of the game ball B that is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is slidably attached in the left-right direction near the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553, and by sliding it to the left, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 further includes an external terminal board 558 attached to the left side of the front view of the ball tank 552 on the upper surface of the portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Although not shown, the external terminal plate 558 is provided with a ground connection portion facing the game board insertion slot 501b side of the main body frame base 501. A ground wire extending from the game board 5 side is connected to the ground connection portion.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. be. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 has a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the tank rail 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 has a payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side, and the ball pulling lever 593 is operated from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit. The game ball B is released to the 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball ejection passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow, and closes a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that is open forward and the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572, the movable piece member 573 that is movable by the game ball B circulating in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is equipped with a ball-cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of a ball (see FIG. 92).

In the ball guidance unit 570, the shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 in front view is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

The guide passage 570a has a depth on the front-back right side and a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends back and forth at the right outer portion of the guide passage 570a in front view, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on the portion protruding into the guide passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cut detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence / absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, the presence / absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7b. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the movable ball-extracting piece is in the open state, and FIG. 90 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). Is. The payout device 580 is detachably attached from the rear to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate in the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can be distributed, and a payout device main body 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the payout motor 584, which is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581 and whose rotary shaft projects between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. A spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 that is attached, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. , The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587, which is meshed with the first transmission gear 586 and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, is meshed with the second transmission gear 587. It has a spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a and a plurality of detection pieces 588b extending outward from the payout gear 588a, and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588, the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the payout gear member 588 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the payout blade 589. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that is attached to the rear side of the apparatus main body 581 and detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and has a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction is larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the width of the left and right and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, on the upper side of the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is formed between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end.

The ball ejection passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view, and is seen in the back view of the bottom surface. It opens downward near the left end.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. Main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to form a narrower gap from each other to the rear and front, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The guide wall 581a on the main body side and the guide wall 582a on the rear lid side branch from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend to the right in the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form the side wall of the ball ejection passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the space between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 includes a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed between the three blade pieces 589a with an arc having a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are formed. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction of the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. See 90).

When the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B, which has been in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592, becomes a ball pulling movable piece 592. It will flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side beyond the above. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball ejection passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as the payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball-extracting passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball-extracting movable piece 592 projecting into the ball-extracting passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball-extracting movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball-extracting movable piece 592 can move to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b due to the contact force, the ball-extracting movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the pull-out passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pull-out movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

For this reason, since the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly, so that the pachinko machine can be used. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving to the outside through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the space between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, and the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made difficult to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball pulling passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7c. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the left side portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects to the right from the right side of the front view, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position at a height of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and downwards from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank payout passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view from the center of the ball storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e, which is open downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 92).

In the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side of the front view on the lower surface. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is open just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e is open just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B discharged (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is released downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7d. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is mounted on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is low, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. The 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a closing spring 614, which is in force.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left when viewed from the front on the upper surface of the portion extending upward from the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball ejection passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction in the front view by the closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are provided. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are each upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank ball path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f. Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7e. Flow of game balls in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 92. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

In the ball tank 552 opened upward, a predetermined number of balls are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the game hall island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent to the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being aligned in a row by the tank rail 551. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. Will be.

Then, the game ball B in the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. As a result, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a moves. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 is normally arranged through the upper ball storage passage 600b and directly below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the dish unit 200. It is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the game ball B is further discharged while the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B, the upper normal payout passage 600c is in the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the full tank ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharging port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further discharged. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B (the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are full. The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 becomes a non-detection state.

When discharging the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, move the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 upward from the position of the lower end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction of the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball ejection passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball removal passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball removal passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball-pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a than the ball-pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball-pulling movable piece 592 Is less likely to be damaged.

Then, the gaming ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 93 to 97 and the like. FIG. 93 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 93 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 95 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and is composed of a plurality of slits extending up and down. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a forms a part of an enclosure 624 in which the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623 contain the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621 in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it goes to the right. Even if it is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. The space of the above and the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43 on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c are extended. Since it is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of the 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, the speaker unit 620a is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess for space 621b in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623. A through-cylinder 623a that communicates with the through-hole 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit mounted on the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guide portion 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball ejection guidance portion 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It is provided with a 628 and a ball discharge port 629 for downwardly discharging the game ball B that has passed through the ball ejection guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628.

The ball ejection guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B ejected from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B ejected from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and the ejecting ball receiving portion 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 has a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and.

The payout control unit 620d has a box-shaped payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 97) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and the payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B is to be paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). The payout control board box 632 is formed so as to leave a trace of opening and closing. As a result, it is possible to detect an unauthorized modification of the payout control board 633, and the deterrence against the unauthorized activity is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 mounted on the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion of the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (main body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends up and down the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 around the axis extending up and down, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3, and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 that project rearward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the outer frame 2, and door frame that protrudes forward from the lower part of the front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the lock unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is equipped with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It stands out. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the lock is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the gaming board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. 99 is a front view of a gaming board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 100 is a front view showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls are distributed on the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is driven by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second major winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 100). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning opening in the game area 5a. The purpose is to entertain the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so that the handle 182 can be received or passed through the mouth 2006 or the like.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square shape in front view, and divides the rear end of the game area 5a. It is equipped with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 100). Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 97, 117, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. A peripheral control unit (not shown) arranged behind the 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 mounted on the front surface and a back unit 3000 mounted on the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and a transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 having an outer periphery slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front constituent member 1000, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) to which the back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side as well as being mounted on the rear side.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, in which the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 that can accept the game ball B in either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B, It is equipped with.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the start port unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the center in the vertical direction at the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 which is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and one general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 which are attached to the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first prize opening 2005 and a second prize opening 2006.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped opening that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has an open front, and is closed by detachably attaching the staging display device 1600 from the rear to the rear wall. It is provided with a back box (not shown) having a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300 installed in the back box.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape from the lower end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the circumferential direction in the clockwise direction, passing through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extending to the upper right diagonally. A game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the front view of the out guide portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closing position and a front view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front constituent member 1000 and the outer rail 1001. Backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is attempted to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached to the game panel 1100. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) to which the back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface as well as being mounted on the rear side of the front component 1000.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, and methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and is recessed upward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings for mounting the front unit 2000 so as to penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially square outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder is provided with a through-hole that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside is approximately the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. ing.

Further, the panel holder has a notch portion notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Board holder]
The board holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 97. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 117) that controls the game content, the payout of the game ball B, and the like, and the main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is destroyed in order to open the main control board box 1320. It is necessary to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against unauthorized acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second start port sensor 2511, a first prize opening sensor 2512, a second prize opening sensor 2513, a start port solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid 2515. , The second attacker solenoid 2516, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the function display unit 1400 has a status display consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two normal lottery results that are drawn by the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003. It includes a normal symbol display consisting of LEDs and a normal holding display consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 has a first special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs indicating the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of at least one of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 ( It is equipped with a round indicator consisting of five LEDs that display the number of rounds).

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, the design, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LED provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 117. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box (not shown) that houses the peripheral control board 1510. , Is equipped. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling light emission effect, sound effect, movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling an effect image.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The staging display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The staging display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. The table unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end has an opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first starting port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004, which can accept the game ball B according to the normal lottery result drawn by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003. 1st special lottery result or 2nd special lottery result that can accept game ball B in at least one of them according to the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery result. , Is equipped.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at a height slightly lower than the general winning opening 2001 on the right side at the lower left of the gate portion 2003. The first prize-winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting opening 2004 and at a height slightly below the first starting opening 2002. The second prize opening 2006 is arranged at a slightly lower position on the left side of the first prize opening 2005.

The table unit 2000 has a starting port unit 2100, which is mounted directly above the out port 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has one general winning opening 2001 and a first starting port 2002, and a starting port. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front view of the unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the right end of the front view in the game area 5a with respect to the center in the vertical direction. A gate unit 2300 which is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, which is attached to a slightly upper side in the center of the front view in the game area 5a. The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006, and the transparent front effect unit 2600 attached so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. And have.

The gate unit 2300 of the table unit 2000 is arranged downward with respect to the center in the vertical direction at the right end of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 formed so that the game balls B can always pass one by one in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game balls B that have passed through the gate portion 2003.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the lower board holder 1200. It is discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower board holder 1200. Will be done.

Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2511, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is detected by the first big winning opening sensor 2512 or the second big winning opening sensor 2513, and then moves to the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is sent and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8a. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. FIG. 101 is a front view of the center accessory and the table effect unit in the table unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged substantially in the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. The 3300 and the like can be visually recognized from the front. In the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It is not possible to invade.

The center accessory 2500 has one general winning opening 2001 arranged in the lower right corner of the front view on the outer circumference of the frame, and a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below the left side of the general winning opening 2001. (2) It has a first large winning opening 2005 arranged below the starting opening 2004 and a second large winning opening 2006 arranged slightly below the left side of the first large winning opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 can release the warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter and the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It is provided with a warp outlet 2502 that is open in the frame, and a stage 2503 that can roll the game ball B discharged from the warp outlet 2502 in the left-right direction and then discharge it into the game area 5a.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). It is formed so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is the lowest when it is attached to 1110). The stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowest portion in the center in the left-right direction becomes lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game region 5a from this portion. In the center accessory 2500, the height of the lowest portion of the stage 2503 is substantially the same as the height of the second starting port 2004.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

Further, the center accessory 2500 has a second start port sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and a first large game ball B that detects the game ball B received in the first big prize opening 2005. It includes a winning opening sensor 2512 and a second major winning opening sensor 2513 that detects a game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2006 (see FIG. 117). Further, the center accessory 2500 has a start port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start. The first attacker solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the opening 2004, and the first starting port 2002 or the first. (2) A second attacker solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the starting port 2004 is provided.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side of the upper surface in the left-right direction and the upper part of the right side of the upper surface are the outer periphery of the game area 5a (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005). A gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. Further, in the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, and the second major winning opening 2006 are arranged in the lower right corner of the front view. The portion of the lower right corner of the front view extends to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and forms a space between the portion of the lower right corner and the portion of the upper part of the right side surface. The gate unit 2300 is arranged in the space.

Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball B to the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 that are open (open) with high probability.

[5-8b. Table production unit]
The table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105 and the like. FIG. 102 is a side sectional view of the front effect unit cut at the center in the left-right direction together with the center accessory and viewed from the right. FIG. 103 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED in the table effect unit and the reflection recess of the table light guide plate. FIG. 104 is a front view showing a light emitting mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 105 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the table effect unit is made to emit light.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. The table effect unit 2600 is attached to the transparent flat plate-shaped front light guide plate 2610, which is closed inside the frame of the center accessory 2500, the reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and the upper surface of the reflector 2620. The center accessory is provided so as to cover the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 that irradiate light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640, and the reflector 2620 from the front. It is equipped with a front cover 2650 attached to 2500.

The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed on the back surface of the transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate main body 2611 and the light guide plate main body 2611, and is formed from any of a plurality of specific light input portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It has a plurality of fine reflection recesses 2613 that reflect the incident light forward. The plurality of specific light input units 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are from four of the first specific light input unit 2612a, the second specific light input unit 2612b, the third specific light input unit 2612c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light input unit 2612a, the second specific light input unit 2612b, the third specific light input unit 2612c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (left-right direction). Then, they are arranged in two rounds in order from left to right (the order in which the fourth specific light input unit 2612d is returned to the beginning and becomes the first specific light input unit 2612a).

The reflection recess 2613 has a plane that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input portion 2612 and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. .. The reflection recess 2613 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. Further, the reflection recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light input unit 2612 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2612, it is reflected by the reflection recess 2613 in the front front surface (perpendicular to the paper surface) of the light guide plate main body 2611. However, the reflective recess 2613 appears to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 103, when light is incident from the non-corresponding specific light entering portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflection recess 2613 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate main body 2611. From the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflection recess 2613 does not appear to emit light.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reflection recess 2613 is shown in a state of being recessed in a triangle and extending in a direction perpendicular to a straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input portion 2612. It is not limited to the above, and any one extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input unit 2612 may be used.

The plurality of reflection recesses 2613 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light input units 2612, and the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a and the second specific light input unit 2612b corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2612a. A plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b corresponding to the above, a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c corresponding to the third specific light input unit 2612c, and a plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2612d. It is composed of a recess 2613d and.

Further, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 capable of displaying light emission in different modes from each other by reflecting light forward by the reflection recess 2613 of a specific group among the plurality of reflection recesses 2613. There is. The plurality of patterns 2614 include a first pattern 2614a consisting of only a plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b consisting of only a plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b, and a third pattern 2614b consisting of only a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c. It is composed of a picture 2614c and a fourth picture 2614d composed of only a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d.

As shown in FIGS. 101 and 104, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentric and circulate in order from the outside to the center (next to the fourth pattern 2614d). Are arranged so as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. The reflector 2620 can sandwich the front side and the back side of the front light guide plate 2610 by inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recess 2621, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. can. On the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recess 2621, through holes 2622 penetrating vertically are formed at a portion corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640.

The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 has a strip-like shape extending to the left and right, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on a portion directly above the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620 on the lower surface. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (attached) to the portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620, respectively. By attaching the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 to the upper surface of the reflector 2620, a plurality of LEDs 2630 are formed so as to face downward through the through holes 2622, respectively.

The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to the plurality of specific light receiving portions 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 include a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light input unit 2612b, and a third specific light input unit 2612c. It is composed of a third LED group 2630c corresponding to the above, and a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide a plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction, and divide them into eight equal parts from left to right. They are arranged in two rounds in order (the order in which the fourth LED group 2630d is returned to the beginning and becomes the first LED group 2630a). In the present embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630.

Next, the light emission effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the first specific light input unit 2612a into the light guide plate main body 2611, and is reflected to the front by the first reflection recess 2613a, and the remaining second light is reflected. Since the second reflection recess 2613b, the third reflection recess 2613c, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front surface, only the first reflection recess 2613a can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The first pattern 2614a composed of the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 104 (a)).

When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the second specific light input unit 2612b into the light guide plate main body 2611, reflected to the front in the second reflection recess 2613b, and the remaining second light is reflected. Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the third reflection recess 2613c, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front surface, only the second reflection recess 2613b can be seen by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. The second pattern 2614b composed of the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 104 (b)).

When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the third specific light input unit 2612c into the light guide plate main body 2611, and is reflected to the front by the third reflection recess 2613c, and the remaining second light is reflected. Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the second reflection recess 2613b, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front surface, only the third reflection recess 2613c can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The third pattern 2614c composed of the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 104 (c)).

When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2612d into the light guide plate main body 2611, and is reflected to the front by the fourth reflection recess 2613d, and the remaining first light is reflected. Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the second reflection recess 2613b, and the third reflection recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front surface, only the fourth reflection recess 2613d can be seen by the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. The fourth pattern 2614d, which is composed of a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d, can emit light (see FIG. 104 (d)).

As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 are arranged in the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED 2630. When the LED group 2630d is made to emit light in this order, the first picture 2614a, the second picture 2614b, the third picture 2614c, and the fourth picture 2614d can be made to emit light in this order, and there is a movement that spreads from the center to the outside. It is possible to perform a light emission effect like an animation.

On the other hand, when a plurality of LEDs 2630 are made to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth LED group 2614d, the third LED group 2614c, and the second LED group 2630a. The picture 2614b and the first picture 2614a can be made to emit light in this order, and a light emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

As described above, according to the table effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be made to emit light by one table light guide plate 2610, so that each pattern can be displayed in an animation or the like. It is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a wide space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. It can be easily secured. Therefore, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. By performing a movable effect by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, entertaining the player and suppressing the deterioration of the interest. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 105, the front light guide plate 2610 makes a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 emerge in front of the staging unit, the decorative body, and the staging display device 1600 by the point-like light emission of the plurality of reflection recesses 2613. Since it is possible to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player who is accustomed to the light emitting effect using the conventional light guide plate, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 well, other players who are away from the front can see the pattern 2614. The light emission display becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and to suppress the attention of other players. At the same time, it is possible to play the game without worrying about other players, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched by the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. As a result, each LED 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group 2630c, fourth LED group 2630d) is arranged at a position corresponding to each specific light input unit 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected forward and forward by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably emitted.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center bonus 2500 in which the center bonus 2500 is mounted in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is light-emitting by the LED 2630, it emits light. The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually performed can be visually recognized from the player side in good condition, making the game difficult to see. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 is attached by two members as in the conventional case. It is possible to eliminate the rattling between the and, and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at a desired position with respect to the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light input unit 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light input unit 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be displayed. It is possible to reliably display the light emission.

Further, since the plurality of specific light input units 2612 are arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) are arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611. The front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) does not surround the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611, and the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate main body 2611. Since it is possible to prevent the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the above from being partitioned, the effect image and the like can be easily seen from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. It is possible to entertain in a good state and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and since there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in the front view, the pachinko machine 1 with a feeling of openness can be obtained, and the game area 5a can be obtained. It can improve the appearance of the inside and make it appealing to the player's attention.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be obtained by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. And a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be made difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give a strong impact to the player who thought that the 2610 does not exist and surprise it, and to entertain the light emission display of multiple patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and suppress the deterioration of the interest. can.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from the player side, it is possible to prevent the reflector 2620 and the like from being seen and the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By making the picture 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not anticipate, and the light emission display of the picture 2614 can be enjoyed, and the player can enjoy the light emission display. It is possible to make people think that there is something good about the game, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the staging display device 1600 capable of displaying the staging image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and the staging image by the staging display device 1600. Since it is possible to show the player a combination of the effects, various effects can be performed by combining them as appropriate, and the player can be less likely to get bored. At the same time, the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600 can be shown. It is possible to entertain the player by the production by the above, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the staging display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the staging display device 1600. By displaying a staging image related to a plurality of patterns 2614 that are emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the patterns 2614 that are emitted and displayed. , A staging (display staging) that can strongly attract the player's interest can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained and the decline in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, the reflective recess 2613 is shown to have a triangular cross section and a constant extension, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross section is a semicircular arc and a constant extension. May be polygonal and have a constant extension, or have a curved cross section and have a constant extension.

Further, the LED 2630 may be a single color or a full color. Further, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light input portion, the reflection recess, and the LED group can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 116. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the lower front center decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable effect unit, and FIG. 107 is a lower front center decorative body and the lower front center decorative body by raising the lower center elevating base in the lower movable effect unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the lower rear center decorative body is made to emit light, and FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the central decoration body, the lower rear center decoration body, the lower left side decoration body, and the lower right side decoration in a state where light is emitted. FIG. 109 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the gaming board is in the state of FIG. 108 and the pressing operation unit of the staging operation unit is in the raised position. Further, FIG. 110 shows the four rotating decorative bodies, the left side rotating decorative body, the left sub-side rotating decorative body, the right side rotating decorative body, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body in the lower movable staging unit, each of which is developed as a decorative portion on each side. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration of. FIG. 111 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the type (size) of the arrow emitted and displayed in the lower movable staging unit.

Further, FIG. 112 is a front view of the game board showing the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body in a state where the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable staging unit from the front. FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable staging unit. FIG. 115 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable staging unit.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It includes a 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 117).

The back unit 3000 is a box shape that is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and has an open front, and has a square opening on the rear wall where the staging display device 1600 faces forward, and a back box at the bottom inside the back box. The lower movable effect unit 3100 installed, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 installed in the upper part of the back box, and the upper front movable effect unit 3200 installed in the upper part of the back box in front of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200. It is equipped with a movable staging unit 3300.

[5-9a. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable staging unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 106 to 111 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part in the back box, and a part of the lower movable effect unit 3100 is located in front of the lower part of the effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is a lower front center decoration unit 3110 attached near the front end of the back box below the effect display device 1600, and a lower center effect unit 3110 arranged behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110. It includes a 3120, a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170, which are arranged on the left and right sides of the lower center effect unit 3120, respectively.

The lower front center decoration unit 3110 includes a lower front center decoration unit 3111 having a trapezoidal shape (inverted isosceles triangle shape with flat vertices) and translucency. The lower front center decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. The lower front center decorative body 3111 can be light-emitting decorated by the lower central decorative substrate of the lower central staging unit 3120.

The lower center effect unit 3120 is mounted on the front of the lower center elevating base 3121 and the lower center elevating base 3121 which are vertically mounted in the back box behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 to provide translucency. A lower center decorative substrate (not shown), which is arranged behind the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front. (Omitted) and a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central elevating base 3121.

Although not shown, the lower center effect unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box, a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base to guide the lower center elevating base in the vertical direction, and a unit. A rod-shaped arm member whose base end extends rotatably around an axis extending back and forth on the base, a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member and inserted into the slit of the lower center elevating base 3121, and an arm member. It is equipped with a lower center lift drive motor that rotates.

Although not shown, the lower center elevating base 3121 has a slit extending to the left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into the slit. The lower center elevating base 3121 is located between a lowering position where the whole is behind the lower front central decorative body 3111 and an ascending position where the whole is above the lower front central decorative body 3111 by the lower central elevating drive motor. It is installed so that it can be raised and lowered.

The lower rear center decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The lower rear center decorative body 3122 can be luminescently decorated by the light emitted from the LED of the lower central decorative substrate. The lower center decorative substrate is mounted so that a plurality of LEDs can independently emit and decorate each light emitting region 3122a of the lower rear center decoration body 3122, and the lower center elevating base 3121 is raised. Occasionally, it is mounted so that it can irradiate light toward the lower front center ornament 3111 which is downward and forward.

Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 at intervals in the left-right direction, and each of the central movable unit 3125 extends upward in a flat plate shape. Multiple central rotation drive motors are mounted on multiple mounting bases with their rotation axes oriented in the left-right direction, and the outer circumference of each center rotation drive motor is mounted on the rotation shaft of each center rotation drive motor. It is provided with a plurality of cubic rotating decorative bodies 3126, which cover the above. The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 are rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right by a central rotation drive motor, and each is arranged coaxially in the left-right direction. Further, each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 has different decorative portions 3127 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 can each rotate independently by the central rotation drive motor.

Further, although not shown, the central movable unit 3125 is attached below each rotating decorative body 3126 on the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121, and a plurality of pieces capable of irradiating light toward each rotating decorative body 3126. It is equipped with a lower center upper surface decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower center upper surface decorative substrate, each rotating decorative body 3126 can be made to emit light.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped lower piece portion and a flat plate-shaped side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece portion. It has a flat plate-shaped upper side extending from the upper end of the side part and the side side part to the upper side of the lower piece part shorter than the lower piece part to the right, and has a front surface of the unit base of the lower center effect unit 3120. A columnar guide shaft whose lower and upper ends are attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively, near the right side of the side side of the left unit base and the left unit base installed in the back box on the left side of the view. A rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends vertically by the lower and upper pieces of the left unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on the outer circumference. And the lower left side elevating base 3151 which has a nut screwed into the male screw member and is slidably attached to the guide shaft, and the lower left which is attached to the left unit base and rotates the male screw member. The side elevating drive motor, the lower left side decorative body 3152 attached to the front of the lower left side elevating base 3151 and having translucency, and the lower left side decorative body 3152 attached to the right side of the lower left side decorative body 3152 to the left. It is equipped with a lower left side decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted.

The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3152a arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each light emitting region is appropriately emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate. The 3152a can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a slider that is slidably attached to the upper part of the lower left side elevating base 3151 in the left-right direction and has a slit extending in the front-rear direction. The lower left slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so that the rotation axis extends upward below the slider, and the base end side attached to the rotation axis of the lower left slide drive motor. A cam member having a columnar sliding pin slidably inserted into the slit of the slider is provided on the tip side extending horizontally from the base end side of the cage.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a mounting base that is mounted on a slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is oriented in the left-right direction on the mounting base. It includes a left-side rotary drive motor that is mounted, and a cubic left-side rotary decorative body 3153 that is mounted on the rotary shaft of the left-side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left-side rotary drive motor. The left side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a left side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left side rotation decoration body 3153 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the left side rotation decoration body 3153. It is equipped with a lower left side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left side upper surface decorative substrate, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be light-emitting decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the sub-mounting base which is mounted on the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub-mounting base. A cubic left sub-side rotation that is mounted on the rotation shaft of the left sub-side rotation drive motor and the left sub-side rotation drive motor that is mounted with the rotation axis oriented in the left-right direction and covers the outer circumference of the left sub-side rotation drive motor. It is equipped with a decorative body 3155. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 has different decorative portions 3156 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 is made rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right by a left sub-side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base, and heads toward the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155. It is equipped with a lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate, the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be illuminated and decorated.

The lower left side staging unit 3150 is at a height at which the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155 attached to the left unit base can enter the lower left side rotating decoration body 3153 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. The lower central elevating base 3121 of the central staging unit 3120 is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, when the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 is assembled on the game board 5, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is located between the lower left side rotation decoration unit 3120 and the leftmost rotation decoration body 3126 of the lower center production unit 3120. There is an interval that allows entry.

The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevating drive motor, so that the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is rotated together with the slider via the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower center effect unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowering position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowering position and an ascending position at the same height as the left subside rotating decorative body 3155. Further, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, by rotating the cam member by the lower left slide drive motor, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is brought close to and adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 via the slider. , It can be slid in the left-right direction between the retracted position, which is located below the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155, about half away from the lower center effect unit 3120.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped lower piece portion and a flat plate-shaped side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece portion. It has a flat plate-shaped upper side that extends to the upper side of the lower piece from the upper end of the side part and the side part to the left shorter than the lower piece, and is the front surface of the unit base of the lower center effect unit 3120. A columnar guide shaft whose lower and upper ends are attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively, near the left side of the side side of the right unit base and the right unit base installed in the back box on the right side of the view. A rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends vertically by the lower and upper pieces of the right unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on the outer circumference. And the lower right side elevating base 3171 that has a nut screwed into the male screw member and is slidably attached to the guide shaft, and the lower right that is attached to the right unit base and rotates the male screw member. The side elevating drive motor, the lower right side decorative body 3172 attached to the front of the lower right side elevating base 3171 and having transparency, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 attached to the right side of the lower right side decorative body 3172 to the right. It is equipped with a lower right side decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted.

The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3172a arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each light emitting region is appropriately emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate. The 3172a can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 has a slider that is slidably attached to the upper part of the lower right side elevating base 3171 in the left-right direction and has a slit extending in the front-rear direction. The lower right slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so that the rotation axis extends upward below the slider, and the base end side attached to the rotation axis of the lower right slide drive motor. A cam member having a columnar sliding pin slidably inserted into the slit of the slider is provided on the tip side extending horizontally from the base end side of the cage.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 has a mounting base that is mounted on a slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is oriented in the left-right direction on the mounting base. It includes a right-side rotary drive motor that is mounted, and a cubic right-side rotary decorative body 3173 that is mounted on the rotary shaft of the right-side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right-side rotary drive motor. The right-side rotating decorative body 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the right side rotation decoration body 3173 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a right side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right side rotation decoration body 3173 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the right side rotation decoration body 3173. It is equipped with a lower right side upper surface decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right side upper surface decorative substrate, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be illuminated and decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the sub-mounting base which is mounted on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub-mounting base. A cubic right sub-side rotation that is mounted on the rotation shaft of the right sub-side rotation drive motor and the right sub-side rotation drive motor that is mounted with the rotation axis oriented in the left-right direction and covers the outer circumference of the right sub-side rotation drive motor. It is equipped with a decorative body 3175. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 has different decorative portions 3176 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 110). Further, the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 is made rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right by a right sub-side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base, and heads toward the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175. It is equipped with a lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate, the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be illuminated and decorated.

The lower right side staging unit 3170 is at a height at which the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 attached to the right unit base can enter the lower right side rotating decorative body 3173 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. The lower central elevating base 3121 of the central staging unit 3120 is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, when the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side rotation decoration body 3173 is placed between the lower right side rotation decoration unit 3120 and the rightmost rotation decoration body 3126 of the lower center production unit 3120. There is an interval that allows entry.

The lower right side effect unit 3170 rotates the male screw member by the lower right side elevating drive motor, so that the right side rotation decoration 3173 is rotated together with the slider via the lower right side elevating base 3171, and the lower center effect unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowering position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowering position and an ascending position at the same height as the right subside rotating decorative body 3175. Further, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, by rotating the cam member by the lower right slide drive motor, the right side rotation decoration 3173 is brought close to and adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 via the slider. , It can be slid in the left-right direction between the retracted position, which is located below the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175, about half away from the lower center effect unit 3120.

As shown in FIG. 110, the lower movable staging unit 3100 has a decorative portion 3127 of each of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, a decorative portion 3154 of the left side rotating decorative body 3153, and a decorative portion 3156 of the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, right. Different decorations are formed on the decorative portion 3174 of the side rotating decorative body 3173 and the decorative portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. The four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 are each formed into a dice-shaped cube and extend to the left and right. Different decorations are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the axis of rotation.

When the front surfaces of the four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 are each facing the front, from the left. They are "凰", "one eye", "one eye", "second eye", "third eye", "four eyes", "one eye", and "凰". In addition, when the second side of each is facing the front, it is "star", "super", "chi", "ya", "n", "su", "!", And "star" from the left. In addition, when the third side is facing the front, it is "!", "凰", "ge", "ki", "a", "tsu", "凰", "!" From the left. Furthermore, when the fourth side is facing the front, it is "celebration", "!", "O", "me", "de", "to", "u", "!!" from the left.

In this way, the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left subside rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right subside rotating decoration 3175 are each facing the front with the same number. Therefore, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value that becomes a "big hit" can be displayed depending on the content of the message.

Further, as shown in FIG. 111, the lower movable staging unit 3100 causes the lower front center decorative body 3111, the lower rear center decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 to emit light as appropriate. "Arrows" of different sizes can be displayed by light emission. Specifically, when only the lower front center decoration body 3111 is made to emit light, a triangular "small arrow" in which the apex of the isosceles triangle points downward can be made to emit light (FIGS. 106 and 111 (a)). reference). Further, when the lower front center decoration 3111 and the raised lower rear center decoration 3122 are made to emit light, a downwardly pointing "middle arrow" having a rod extending upward larger than the "small arrow" is emitted and displayed. (See FIGS. 107 and 111 (b)). Further, in the state of the "middle arrow", the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 are raised, and the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right are raised. When all the side decorations 3172 are made to emit light, a "large arrow" in which the upper end of the arrow pointing downward larger than the "middle arrow" is widened to the left and right can be emitted (FIG. 108 and 111 (c)). See).

In this way, since it is possible to emit light and display three arrows of different sizes, "small arrow", "medium arrow", and "large arrow", "big arrow", "medium arrow", and "large arrow" are "big hits" in that order. It is possible to display that the expected value is high.

Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In the lower center effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the lower center effect unit 3100 has a lower center elevating base 3121 behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and is invisible from the front. The four rotary decorative bodies 3126 attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 are located so as to be in contact with the upper end of the lower front center decorative body 3111 in the front view.

Further, in the normal state, in the lower left side staging unit 3150, the lower left side evacuation base 3151 is located at a lower position slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and almost invisible from the front. The left side rotating decoration 3153 is separated from the lower center effect unit 3120 to the left via the slider, and about half of it is located in the retracted position below the left sub side rotating decoration 3155, and the left sub side rotating decoration 3155 is a game. It is located near the left end in the region 5a, which is downward from the center in the vertical direction.

Further, under a normal state, in the lower right side staging unit 3170, the lower right side elevating base 3171 is located at a lower position slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and almost invisible from the front. The right side rotating decoration 3173 is separated to the right from the lower center effect unit 3120 via the slider, and about half of it is located in the retracted position below the right sub side rotating decoration 3175, and the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 is a game. It is located near the right end in the region 5a, which is downward from the center in the vertical direction.

As one of the effects presented to the player in this normal state, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. According to the lottery result, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 that has stopped rotating. To be visually recognized by the player. As a result, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and the movable effect of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be enjoyed. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies the predetermined conditions, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central elevating base 3121 by the lower central decorative substrate. Is emitted to emit light to decorate the lower front central decoration unit 3111 of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 located in front of the unit. As a result, as shown in FIG. 106, the lower front center decorative body 3111 emits a downward arrow, and the downward arrow emits light to display the player's line of sight below the game area 5a. It is possible to guide the player to the effect operation unit 301 arranged in, and it is possible to urge the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and it is easy to participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Alternatively, from the normal state, the lower center elevating base 3121 is set according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Raise from the descending position to the ascending position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Not only can the person be surprised, but the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. After that, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 that has stopped rotating is given to the player. Make it visible. As a result, when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination, the player may be made to think that it must be a "big hit" (a lottery result in which an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous occurs). It is possible to make the player feel excited depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the lottery result. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies the predetermined conditions, a plurality of lower central decorative substrates attached to the rising lower central elevating base 3121. The LED is made to emit light, and the lower rear center decorative body 3122 arranged in the front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 arranged in the lower front are made to emit light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107, the lower rear center decoration body 3122 and the lower front center decoration body 3111 cause a large downward arrow to be emitted and displayed. The line of sight of the person can be guided to the staging operation unit 301 arranged below the game area 5a to urge the player to operate the staging operation unit 301, and the staging operation unit 301 can be displayed by emitting a large arrow. By operating it, it is possible to make the player think that it is a "big hit", and the player can operate the production operation unit 301 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Furthermore, depending on the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the normal state, the lower center elevating base 3121 Is raised from the descending position to the ascending position. As a result, the lower rear center decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Not only can the person be surprised, but the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. Subsequently, after sliding the left and right left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173 to the appearance positions on the center side, respectively, the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 respectively. Raise to the ascending position (see FIG. 108). As a result, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left-side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right-side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the lottery result seem to be a "big hit". After that, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left-side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right-side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are rotated and then stopped to rotate to the left. The decoration part 3156 of the sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the decoration part 3154 of the left side rotating decoration 3153, the decoration part 3127 of each of the four rotating decorations 3126, the decoration part 3174 of the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration. The player is made to visually recognize the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decorative portions 3127 include the decorative portion 3127 on which the numerical decoration is applied, the countdown is started by stopping the rotation of the numerical decorative portion 3127 so as to face forward. It is possible to perform an effect as if it were done, and the countdown effect can make the player think that the lottery result must be a "big hit" and enhance the interest in the game. Then, when the rotation of the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155, the left side rotating decoration body 3153, the four rotating decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotating decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 is stopped and the countdown is completed, the countdown is completed. The lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right side decoration 3172 are luminescently decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, a larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is emitted and displayed, so that the player can operate the staging operation unit 301 arranged at the tip of the huge arrow. It is possible to be convinced that the lottery result is a "big hit", and the player can be sure to operate the staging operation unit 301. When this huge arrow is emitted and displayed, the effect display device 1600 is displayed with a message explaining the effect operation unit 301, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised, and the effect operation unit 301 is rotated. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 109). As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates at a high speed, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. Therefore, the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably pressed, which entertains the player and reduces the interest. Can be suppressed.

As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 109, the character "The rotation of the lower button is hot!" Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the rotation operation unit 302 is focused on the player to perform the rotation operation. The faster the rotation speed of the unit 302, the higher the expected value of "big hit" is to inform the player. That is, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and the effect image for notifying the player of the expected value is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in FIG. 109, as an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a lower front center decorative body 3111, a lower rear center decorative body 3122, and a lower left side decoration as shown in FIG. 111. It is also possible to display an effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 in which the player's operation is prompted by the "arrow" emitted and displayed by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, and the like. Specifically, an effect image such as "press the button!", "Turn the dial!", "Turn the dial to the left!", "Turn the dial to the right!", Etc. is displayed. As a result, the operation of the staging operation unit 301 can be accurately performed, and the player participation type staging that operates the staging operation unit 301 can be surely enjoyed.

Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the expected value that becomes a "big hit" may be displayed by the effect image. Expected values are obtained using four rotating decorations 3126, left side rotating decoration 3153, left subside rotating decoration 3155, right side rotating decoration 3173, and right subside rotating decoration 3175, each of which is formed in a dice shape. It may be displayed.

As an expected value display using four rotating decorations 3126, left side rotating decorations 3153, left subside rotating decorations 3155, right side rotating decorations 3173, and right subside rotating decorations 3175, which are each formed in a dice shape. Performs an effect of displaying the expected value of a "big hit" by combining each of the decorative parts 3127, the decorative part 3154, the decorative part 3156, the decorative part 3174, and the decorative part 3176, which face the front by rotating and stopping each. .. Specifically, when only the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 of the lower central staging unit 3120 in the center are used, for example, there are the following three patterns. In the pattern a1, the expected value is displayed in a state in which the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing the front when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating is a disjointed combination in which the player cannot read the meaning. No pattern. In the pattern a2, the expected value is high to some extent in the state where each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 stops rotating with the second surface facing the front and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is "chi", "ya", "n", and "su". The pattern displaying that. In the pattern a3, the expected value is extremely high in the state where each rotating decorative body 3126 stops rotating with the third surface facing the front and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is "ge", "ki", "a", and "tsu". The pattern displaying that. In this way, the expected value can be displayed by the pattern displayed by the rotation stop of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of the pattern a1, the pattern a2, and the pattern a3.

Further, as an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 ( Using the dice-shaped rotating body of eight), the effect of displaying the expected value of "big hit" by combining the decorative part 3127, the decorative part 3154, the decorative part 3156, the decorative part 3174, and the decorative part 3176 is produced. You may do it. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. In the pattern b1, the combinations of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 that have stopped rotating are different combinations (the expected value is not displayed). In pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "chi" "ya" " The combination of "n" and "su", the right side rotating decoration 3173 is "!" Or "凰", and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is "凰" or "star" (chance display). In the pattern b3, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "ge" "ki" " A "" "tsu", the right side rotating decoration 3173 is a combination of "!" Or "凰", and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (Gekiatsu display). In pattern b4, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "chi" "ya" "n" "su". , The right side rotating decoration 3173 is a combination of "!", And the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (super chance display). In pattern b5, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "ge" "ki" "a" "tsu". , The right side rotating decoration 3173 is a combination of "!", And the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (super gekiatsu display). In pattern b6, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "celebration", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!", The four central rotating decorations 3126 are "o", "me", "de", "to", and the right side. The combination of the rotating decoration 3173 is "U" and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is "!!" ("Big hit" confirmed). As described above, it is displayed by stopping the rotation of eight rotating bodies of four rotating decorative bodies 3126, left side rotating decorative body 3153, left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, right side rotating decorative body 3173, and right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern b1, pattern b2, pattern b3, pattern b4, pattern b5, and pattern b6.

In the above effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect of displaying the expected value as described above is not performed. , The light emission display of "arrow" is also turned off. On the other hand, if the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect of displaying the above expected value using the remaining effect time is performed. When the effect time is over, the above-mentioned effect is completed and the light emission display of the "arrow" is turned off to end the effect.

As described above, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the game state changes due to the game being performed in the game area 5a under the normal state (the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). (Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of B), the four rotating decorations 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front center decoration 3111 rotate or the lower center. The four rotating ornaments 3126 arranged side by side by the elevating base 3121 rise together with the lower rear central decorative body 3122, and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 raised by the lower central elevating base 3121 rotate, and the lower left A pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173 slide in the left-right direction by the lower left slide drive motor of the side effect unit 3150 and the lower right slide drive motor of the lower right side effect unit 3170 (slide mechanism). The left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173 rotate, and the left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration are provided by the slide mechanism and the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left subside rotating decoration 3155, and the right subside rotating decoration 3175, on which 3173 is rising, are lined up in the left-right direction, and the left subside rotating decoration 3155 and the right subside rotating decoration 3175 rotate. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect such as The decorative body 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 and the like can be noticed, and the movable effect by them can be enjoyed.

Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the descending end, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 is made to emit light and the lower front central decorative body 3111 is made to emit light, so that a downward arrow is emitted and the lower center elevating is displayed. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111 to emit light by a plurality of LEDs on the lower central decorative substrate, a large downward arrow can be displayed by emitting light, or a pair of lower left side elevating and lowering. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to make the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. The effect can also entertain the player, and the downward arrow displayed by the light emitting can guide the player's line of sight to the effect operation unit 301 below, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301. Can be urged. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, and presses the pressing operation unit 303 to participate in the player participation type effect. Can be entertained.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light emission effects, and player participation type effects as described above, it is possible to present various patterns of effects to the player by appropriately combining them. Since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored and to make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected production. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in the interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the lower front center decoration body 3111, the lower rear center decoration body 3122, the lower left side decoration body 3152, the lower right side decoration body 3172, etc. are used to emit a downward arrow to display the downward arrow to the player. When prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 is provided with an effect image for prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an effect image explaining the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of the effect and the effect operation unit 301, etc., it is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301. The staging operation unit 301 can be easily operated, and the player-participatory staging can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

[5-9b. Movable production unit after the upper part]
The upper rear movable staging unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 112 to 114 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part in the back box above the effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box.

The upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is attached to the left base 3211 mounted in the back box and the left base 3211 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper left to the lower right, although detailed illustration is omitted. The left slider 3212, the linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with the rotation axis facing in the front-rear direction, and the upper rear left. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3214 and connected to the rotation shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 on the input side, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the drive gear 3215 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3216 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3217, the third transmission gear 3218 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3217 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211, the third transmission gear 3218, and the rack gear 3213, respectively. It is equipped with a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3219 that is meshed and rotatably attached to the left base 3211.

Further, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and is attached to the rear side of the flat plate-shaped upper rear left decorative body 3220 extending to the left and right and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 to the front surface. It is equipped with an upper rear left decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 can be luminescently decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear left decorative substrate.

The upper rear left unit 3210 can raise and lower the upper rear left decorative body 3220 via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left drive motor 3214.

The upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is attached to the right base 3231 installed in the back box and the right base 3231 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper right to the lower left, although detailed illustration is omitted. The right slider 3232, the linear rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, the upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with the rotation axis oriented in the front-rear direction, and the upper rear right drive. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the motor 3234 and connected to the rotation shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234 on the input side, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the gear 3235 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3236 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231. A spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237, a third transmission gear 3238 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3237 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231, and meshes with the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233, respectively. It is equipped with a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3239, which is rotatably attached to the right base 3231.

Further, the upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and is attached to the rear side of the flat plate-shaped upper rear right decorative body 3240 extending to the left and right and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the front surface. It is equipped with an upper rear right decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be luminescently decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear right decorative substrate.

The upper rear right unit 3230 can raise and lower the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234.

The clutch mechanism 3250 has a tubular accommodating case 3251 and a plurality of protruding portions 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 in the accommodating case 3251, and has an upper rear left drive motor 3214 or an upper portion. An input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a inserted in the accommodating case 3251 with a protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252 having a circumferential gap. A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so that the distance from the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 becomes narrower as it approaches the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 projecting from the accommodating case 3251. An output member 3253 having an output shaft 3253c to which the output member 3253 is attached, a plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between a plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and an inner surface of the accommodating case 3251, and an accommodating case 3251. It has a tightening spring 3255 that is tightened from the outside, and a storage recess 3256a that houses the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255. It is provided with a lid member 3257 that closes the accommodating recess 3256a of the 3256 and through which the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 penetrates, and a bearing 3258 that is attached to the lid member 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted. (See FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c)).

In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the plurality of protruding portions 3252a of the input member 3252 become the circumferential ends of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253. The abutment causes the output member 3253 to rotate, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can directly transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side.

Further, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves in the direction of the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrow, and the roller 3254 is bitten between them. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is rearward via the input member 3252. It is not transmitted to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 or the upper rear right decorative body 3240 acts downward due to gravity, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 via the output member 3253. Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission, and a load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be left stopped at an arbitrary position.

In the clutch mechanism 3250 of the present embodiment, the accommodating case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodating case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodating recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined value, the tightening force (urging force) of the tightening spring 3255 is increased. ), The accommodation case 3251 rotates, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 abuts on the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated with a strong force from the output side, slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the accommodation case 3251 and the accommodation case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 may be strongly bitten and the lock cannot be released, or the output member 3253 and the accommodating case 3251 may be damaged. Can be prevented from doing so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and also inserts the two rollers 3254. May be configured to urge each of the protrusions 3252a side close to each other by a lock spring 3260. As a result, when a force for rotating the output member 3253 is applied from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the accommodation case 3251. It can be engaged between the inner surface and the rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from the action of rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side until the lock is applied. It can be reduced as much as possible.

Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. Under normal conditions, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is located above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is invisible from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are not driven respectively, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 , The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and the upper part The rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission.

As a result, in order to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving downward, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. It is not necessary to provide an electric lock mechanism for preventing the pachinko machine 1, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. Further, since the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250 can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving without permission, the game board 5 can be transported or attached to the island equipment of the game hall. Even if vibration or acceleration acts in such a case, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the state of the origin at the time of shipment, and there is no need to perform unnecessary origin adjustment. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required to install the game board 5, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 move diagonally downward toward the center via the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 The right end of the upper rear right ornament 3240 abuts to form one large ornament (see FIG. 112). As a result, a large decorative body extending to the left and right appears on the upper part of the front surface of the staging display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised, the player can be entertained, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right). Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the decorative body 3240), vibration from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies that can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232, and the upper part are provided. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the output is output. The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the member 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. The transmission of rotation from the left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is cut off and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending arbitrarily, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are unexpected via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. It is possible to prevent the player from moving (falling), and to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from giving a distrust to the player due to unintended movement. It is possible to entertain the player with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at any height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. It is possible to show the player a variety of staging patterns that stop ascending and descending at the position, making it difficult for the player to get bored with the movable staging of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is provided. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being damaged at an early stage due to an overload, and the upper portion can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, prevent the player from being uncomfortable, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 114 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are each connected by a lock spring 3260. When the protrusions 3252a, which are close to each other, are urged, the rollers 3254 are immediately applied when a force for rotating the output member 3253 is applied from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is released after rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 up to this point can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, by moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other. Since the upper rear right decorative bodies 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, the appearance of the large decorative body by combining them can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player. At the same time, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous to the player due to the appearance of a large decorative body may occur, and the expectation for the game. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress the decline in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are in contact with each other and united, they try to move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side by contacting each other. However, since each of them has a clutch mechanism 3250, a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (rotating from the output side). Even if a force) is applied, the roller 3254 is engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving due to contact with each other, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body due to the reaction of the contact. It is also possible to prevent the 3240 from returning, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with a movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are in contact with each other and unite, and suppress the deterioration of the interest. ..

Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the accommodating case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodating case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodating recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256, so that the output member is output from the output side. The 3253 is rotated and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 so that the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force for rotating the accommodation case 3251 acts via a plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) for rotating the accommodation case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. If it is larger than, slippage occurs between the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the storage case 3251 rotates. Then, as the housing case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end portion of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated with a strong force from the output side, slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the accommodation case 3251 and the accommodation case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 may be strongly bitten and the lock cannot be released, or the output member 3253 and the accommodating case 3251 may be damaged. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the above-mentioned action and effect.

[5-9c. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable staging unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 115 and 116. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 at the upper part in the back box above the effect display device 1600 in front view. The upper front movable staging unit 3300 is attached to the horizontally long unit base 3301 mounted on the upper part in the back box, the upper front drive motor 3302 mounted on the unit base 3301, and the unit base 3301 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that moves up and down by being driven by an upper front drive motor 3302.

The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the circular central decorative body 3351 and the central decorative body 3351 which are attached so as to be vertically (downward) up and down at the center of the unit base 3301 in the horizontal direction. A pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a are connected to each other and are rotatably attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The first protruding decorative body 3352 having the connecting rod 3352b, the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a are connected to each other. It has a second connecting rod 3353b that is coaxially attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 and rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The second protruding decorative body 3353 and the like are provided.

In the first protruding decorative body 3352, a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a are formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. In the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the left side. Further, the first protruding decorative body 3352 has a link attaching portion 3352c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the right side, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the tip of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side.

In the second protruding decorative body 3353, a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a are formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. In the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the right side. Further, the second protruding decorative body 3353 has a link mounting portion 3353c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the left side, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the tip of the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side.

In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 are formed to have the same shape and the same size. There is. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side behind the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the left side and a first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side behind the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the right side. Positionally, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are configured to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

Further, although not shown, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a plurality of LEDs on the front side of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a. Has an upper front center decorative substrate, a first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, and a second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, the central decorative body 3351, a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and a pair. The second protruding decoration portion 3353a can be independently luminescently decorated.

In addition, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 around an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction at a symmetrical position with the center in the left-right direction of the front surface in between, and outward in the left-right direction. The pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod shape and the tip of each of the pair of first link rods 3303 are rotatably attached around an axis whose base end side extends back and forth, and the tip side protrudes first. A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative body 3353, and the front surface of the unit base 3301. It is provided with an upper stopper 3305 that projects forward from the front and regulates the upward rotation of the tip end side of the first link rod 3303, and a lower stopper 3306 that regulates the downward rotation of the tip end side of the first link rod 3303. ing.

Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 99 and the like, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is raised, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. At the same time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 116 (a)). In this normal state, since the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction, the player can be made to recognize that the decorative body is one. Further, in the normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stopper 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Then, the central decorative body 3351 moves downward together with the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353. At this time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward while remaining horizontally extended. By moving the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 downward, the second link rod 3304 on the right side and the second link rod 3304 on the right side attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side and the left side. The second link rod 3304 on the left side attached to the link attachment portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the above moves downward, and a pair of second link rods 3304 are attached to their respective tips. The first link rod 3303 rotates so that the tip side of each rotates downward.

Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 rotating with the downward movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (center decorative body 3351) abut on the lower stopper 3306, further rotation was prevented. It becomes a state (see FIG. 116 (b)). When the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward after the pair of first link rods 3303 abut on the lower stopper 3306, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side are moved. Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are located at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b. Centering on the center of the central decorative body 3351), the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the opposite side to the side to which the second link rod 3304 is attached rotate in the downward movement direction. (See FIG. 116 (c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so that the scissors open, respectively. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged, and the player can be surprised and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, under the normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 are overlapped in the front-rear direction to form one decorative body. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are rotated and opened so that the tips are separated from each other. It is possible to surprise the player who has recognized it as one decorative body, and to entertain the movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350.

Further, by the action of the first link rod 3303 and the second link rod 3304, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be moved to the central decorative body 3351 by simply moving the upper front movable decorative body 3350 downward. It is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 because the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be rotated and opened in opposite directions to each other.

[6. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 117. FIG. 117 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 displays the effect image on the effect display device 1600 based on the command from the peripheral control unit 1511 and the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on the command from the main control board 1310. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 for controlling the above. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout and the like of the game ball B, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by the rotation operation of the handle 182.

[6-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustrations are omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a ROM (main control built-in ROM) that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a RAM (main control built-in RAM) that temporarily stores data. ) Etc. are built-in microprocessors, main control MPUs, main control I / O ports as input / output devices (I / O devices), and main control input circuits to which detection signals from various detection switches are input. , A main control solenoid drive circuit for driving various solenoids, and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. It was accepted by the mouth sensor 2511, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2301 that detects the game ball B that passed through the gate unit 2003, and the first large winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2512 that detects the game ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are detected. The detection signals from the magnetic sensor 3003, etc. are input via the main control I / O ports, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid are used. The drive signal is output to 2516, and the status display, normal symbol display, normal hold display, first special symbol display, first special hold number display, of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, A drive signal is output to a second special symbol display, a second special hold number display, a round display, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first large winning opening sensor 2512, and the second large winning opening sensor 2513 are non-contact type electromagnetic waves. While the proximity switch of the type is used, the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2511 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301.

Further, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters. , The detection of the game ball B by the first prize opening sensor 2512 and the second prize opening sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first prize opening sensor 2512 and the second prize opening sensor 2513. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or something. Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I / O port. Although the details of the main control MPU will be described later, when the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, these various commands are shaped and transmitted to the peripheral control unit 1511.

Although detailed description will be described later, various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. It is equipped with.). With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of this RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU via the main control I / O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633 that controls the payout of the game ball B is a payout control unit 633a that controls various payouts, a launch control by the launch solenoid 542, and a launch control by the ball feed solenoid 145. The control unit 633b, the error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, the error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display, the ball tank 552, and the tank rail during maintenance. It is provided with a ball pulling switch for discharging the game ball B in the 553, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 (upper plate 201) and starting the ball pulling operation.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the apparatus 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to the payout serially via the payout control I / O port, or the main control board 1310. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch from is input via the payout control I / O port, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, and the ball cutout detection sensor 574 is paid out. Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input.

The detection signals from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control input circuit, and the payout control is performed via the payout control I / O port. It is input to the MPU.

Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are input to the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control input circuit, and is input to the payout control MPU via the payout control I / O port.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 to the payout motor 584 via the payout control I / O, and outputs a signal for displaying the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. , Output to the error LED display via the payout control I / O port, or send a command to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1 to the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port in a serial manner. Alternatively, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 558 via the payout control I / O port. The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumericals, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a defect has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it means that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it notifies that "CR is not connected" (meaning that the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the areas from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port to the payout control MPU. Entered. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input to and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and a launch It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the firing reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182, and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will is detected. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, they are input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the firing timing control circuit. The signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this firing solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the firing reference pulse generates a driving current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 is stored. One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power cutoff process even when the power supply is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 117, the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 1310, and an effect display device 1600 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 1511. It is provided with an effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511 that controls the effect on the peripheral control board 1510 has a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and high-quality sound performance. It is provided with a sound source IC for performing sound effects, and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, sound, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

Further, the peripheral control unit 1511 may further include a peripheral control RAM. The peripheral control RAM is used for various information (for example, schedule data and various types that define a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600) that is continued across the peripheral control unit steady processing that is executed every time a V blank signal described later is input. Information for managing schedule data, etc. that defines the light emission mode of LEDs, etc.) is stored.

The peripheral control MPU has a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. built-in, and when various commands are received from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. The game board side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED or the like is transmitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board to each decorative board of the game board 5. , The drive motor of the game board 5 or the drive motor of the game board 5 from the serial I / O port for the game board decorative drive board to output the drive data on the game board side for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5. Door-side drive data for transmitting to the drive solenoid and outputting drive signals to the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the like, and each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The door-side drive light emission data composed of the door-side light emission data for outputting the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the color LED or the like provided in the frame decoration drive board serial I / O port. In addition to transmitting from to the door frame 3 side, or transmitting control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 from the serial I / O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512. , A control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM is output to the sound source IC.

The detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are peripheral control MPUs. Has been entered in. Further, the detection signals from the pressure detection sensor 381, the ascent detection sensor 376a, the descent detection sensor 382, the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the second rotation detection sensor 348 of the staging operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 are peripherally controlled. It is input to the MPU.

Further, in the peripheral control MPU, a signal (operation signal) indicating that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally is input from the effect display control unit 1512, and the effect display control unit 1512 is based on this operation signal. The operation is being monitored.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU, and has a vibration speaker 354, a top center speaker 462, and a top side provided on the door frame 3, the main body frame 4, and the like. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects are played from the speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. The volume can be adjusted by rotating the volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In the present embodiment, the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 on the door frame 3 side and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4 have acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo) as sound information. By sending a signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic acoustic effect (acoustic effect) than before.

In addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control unit 1511 also includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control MPU has a built-in WDT and an external device. In combination with WDT, he diagnoses whether his system is out of control.

The display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed by the serial input / output port, and in the present embodiment, the bit rate (the size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) is 19.2 km (19.2 km). k) BPS (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting blinking command, the game board side lighting blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc. output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect drive board of the game board 5 are input with a plurality of serials different from the display commands. It is performed by the output port, and in this embodiment, 250 kbps is set as the bit rate.

The effect drive board outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received lighting / blinking command on the door frame side to the LED of each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, or is based on the received lighting / blinking command on the game board side. The lighting signal or blinking signal is output to the LED of each decorative board provided on the game board 5.

Further, the staging drive board transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the operation ring drive motor 342 and the operation button elevating drive motor 367 provided in the door frame 3, each drive motor provided in the game board 5, and the like. Output to.

[6-3b. Direction display control unit]
The staging display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the staging display device 1600. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 displays and controls a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and a production display device 1600. (Abbreviation for Video Display Processor), an image ROM that stores various data of the screen displayed on the effect display device 1600, and an image RAM in which various data stored in the image ROM are transferred and copied. I have.

This display control MPU has a built-in parallel I / O port, serial I / O port, etc., and controls VDP based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to draw the effect display device 1600. It is in control. If the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 1511. Further, the display control MPU performs interrupt processing when an executing signal is input from VDP and the output of the executing signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM includes various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and control data (display command). Multiple corresponding non-residential area transfer schedule data, etc. are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the screen configuration in chronological order, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging the non-resident area transfer data that defines the order of various data stored in the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in chronological order. As the non-resident area transfer data, the order in which the screen data drawn on the effect display device 1600 according to the progress of the schedule data is transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM is defined.

The display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then outputs the screen data following the first screen data. It is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data from the display control ROM one by one from the first screen data and outputs the screen data to the VDP.

When the screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and generates drawing data to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The generated drawing data is output to the effect display device 1600. Further, when the effect display device 1600 does not accept the screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an executing signal to that effect to the display control MPU. The line buffer method is adopted for VDP. This "line buffer method" means that the drawing data for one line that draws the left-right direction of the effect display device 1600 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in the line buffer is stored in the effect display device 1600. It is a method to output to.

An extremely large amount of sprite data is stored in the image ROM, and its capacity is large. When the capacity of the image ROM becomes large, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, which affects the speed of drawing on the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the image RAM. The sprite data is basic data that is data before the sprite is expanded into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, the "sprite" will be described. The "sprite" is an image displayed on the staging display device 1600 as a unit. For example, when displaying various people (characters) on the effect display device 1600, the data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of people on the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to people, houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are drawn on the effect display device 1600 by setting the positions arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter, referred to as "the order of superimposing the sprites").

The sprite is configured by laminating a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels in each of the vertical and horizontal directions. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one sprite character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, a total of 6 sprite characters arranged in a width of 2 x a height of 3 can be used. Can be expressed. In the case of a larger sprite such as a background, it can be expressed by using a larger number of sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The staging display device 1600 repeats a main scan for setting a display state for each pixel in one direction along a pixel and a main scan in a direction intersecting the one direction, sequentially from left to right when viewed from the front. It is driven by a sub-scan that is performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the staging display control unit 1512 is input to the staging display device 1600, the staging display device 1600 sequentially performs one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the staging display device 1600 as the main scan. It is output to each pixel of. Then, when the output for one line is completed, the effect display device 1600 shifts to the line directly below as a sub-scan, and similarly, when the drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As the main scan, outputs are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right when viewed from the front of the effect display device 1600.

[7. Game content]
The content of the game by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the striking can be. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B abuts on the obstacle nails N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while abutting against the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied from the warp outlet 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged from the center in the left-right direction to the front. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the portion is located directly above the first start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted by the first start port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved toward the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200 or the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike). , Is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. In addition to the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this portion is provided with a second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 and a general winning opening 2001, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the game ball B hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and if the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port is closed. The 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery until the result of the ordinary lottery is suggested (for example, 0). 0.01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the normal lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous normal lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, the number of pending results is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability change (probability fluctuation) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, the game ball B is drawn by being accepted in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The special lottery results include "missing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability fluctuation)", "time reduction (time reduction)", and " There are "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", etc.

The special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are the special lottery results that generate an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are received. A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are dispensed from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006 allows the game ball B to be accepted, it is often possible to have the first major winning opening 2005 or the second major winning opening 2006 accept the game ball B. The game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice) to close after the open state is acceptable. On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. If either the progress or the acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B to the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is satisfied, the game balls B cannot be accepted. The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) in the closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that the special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), and the display time of the effect image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port 2002 and the period from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the lottery special lottery result due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lighting LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, it is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510, and the suggestion of the special lottery result is performed as the effect image. The staging image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the staging display device 1600 is a staging image in which three picture columns consisting of a plurality of pictures are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern string is varied to display the pattern. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows is stopped and displayed so that the patterns of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed are in a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) is generated according to the special lottery result.

It should be noted that the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the staging display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed). It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying an effect image for suggesting a special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to stand out by 367, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, each decorative board provided in the game board 5, front effect unit 2600, lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and upper rear It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc. by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the player's game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type staging in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 may display to that effect.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[8. Various control processes on the main control board]
[8-1. Main control side power-on processing]
When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 executes the main control program to execute the main control side power-on processing. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main control side power-on processing.

When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU first executes the initialization processing (step S202). In the initialization process, the execution conditions of the interrupt process are set, and the data to be stored in the main control built-in RAM is set according to the activation state of the pachinko machine 1.

For example, in the event of a power failure or momentary power failure, when the power is restored, the data stored in the main control built-in RAM is restored based on the game information backed up in order to restore the state before the power was cut off. On the other hand, when the power of the gaming machine is turned on when the hall is opened (when the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated), a RAM clear process for initializing the main control built-in RAM is executed.

When the initialization process is completed, the main control MPU first determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been detected (step S208). The power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit as a power failure warning when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or the power failure or momentary power failure occurs.

When the power failure warning signal is not detected (the result of step S208 is "No"), the main control MPU executes the non-winning random number update process (step S218). In the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not related to the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. The non-winning random number includes, for example, a reach determination random number, a variation display pattern random number, a big hit symbol initial value determination random number, a small hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the like. After that, the non-winning random number update process is continuously executed until the power failure warning signal is detected.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU detects a power failure warning signal, the main control side power cutoff process for protecting the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S219). In the main control side power cutoff process, first, the execution of the interrupt process is prohibited to prevent writing to the main control built-in RAM, and the game information is protected from rewriting. Further, the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2514, the function display unit 1400, and the like is stopped, a checksum for determining the validity of the game information is calculated at the time of recovery from a power failure, and a backup flag is set.

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the power is restored after that, the main control side power-on processing is executed, and the game protected by the main control side power-off processing. Restore to the state before the power failure based on the information.

[8-2. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described. The main control side timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (for example, 4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on time process (FIG. 118).

When the main control side timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU clears the interrupt flag (step S72). When the interrupt flag is cleared, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is clocked from the initial value.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes the switch input process (step S74). In the switch input process, various signals input to the input terminals of each main control I / O port of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. For example, a detection signal from the first big prize opening sensor 2512 that detects the game ball B that has entered the first big winning opening 2005, and the second big winning that detects the game ball B that has entered the second big winning opening 2006. A detection signal from the mouth sensor 2513, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B that has entered the first start port 2002, and a second that detects the game ball B that has entered the second start port 2004. (Ii) The detection signal from the start port sensor 2511, the detection signal from the magnetic detection switch 3024 that detects fraudulent activity using a magnet, the prize ball command transmitted by the prize ball control process described later, etc. are read and input information as input information. Store in the storage area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU performs a timer update process for managing the time by subtracting from the set measurement time until the timer interrupt cycle (4 ms) becomes 0 (step S76). The measurement time in the timer update process includes, for example, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the variation display pattern determined by the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process described later, and the normal symbol and the ordinary electric accessory control process described later. In addition to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, the payer ACK indicating that the payout control board 633 normally received various commands transmitted by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). There is a time until a signal is input (ACK signal input determination time) and the like.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes the winning random number update process (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are updated.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes the prize ball control process (step S80). In the prize ball control process, a prize ball command for paying out a game ball is created, and a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is created. .. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball B enters the first major winning opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 10 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633, or the prize ball command is paid out. When the payer ACK signal indicating that the board 633 has normally received is not input within the specified time, a self-check command is created to check the connection status between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 and payout. It is transmitted to the control board 633.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes the frame command reception process (step S82). The frame command reception process receives various commands output from the payout control board 633.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes the fraud detection process (step S84). In the fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area and the detection signal from the first big prize opening sensor 2512 is input when the big hit game state is not obtained (the game ball enters the first big winning opening 2005). When the detection signal from the second major winning opening sensor 2513 is input (when the game ball enters the second major winning opening 2006), etc., the winning abnormality display command is issued as an abnormal state. create.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S86). In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value (“special lottery”), and whether or not the random number for jackpot symbol matches the probability variation hit determination value. Judgment (determination of whether or not to generate random number fluctuation). Here, the "probability fluctuation" means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than that in the normal time (low probability). Details of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 120.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a normal symbol and a normal electric accessory control process (step S88). In the normal symbol and the normal electric accessory control process, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2301 is input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port, a random number for determining the normal symbol hit is extracted. Then, it is determined whether or not the random number for determining the normal symbol hit matches the normal symbol hit determination value (“normal lottery”). Based on this determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery), it is determined whether or not to open the second starting port 2004. By opening the second starting port 2004, the game state is such that the game ball can be accepted into the second starting port 2004, which is advantageous to the player.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes the port output process (step S90). In the port output process, various signals are output from the output terminals of each main control I / O port of the main control MPU. For example, the main control program sends a main payment ACK signal to the payout control board 633 when various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information. It outputs a drive signal to the first attacker solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the first big winning opening 2005 and the second attacker solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second big winning opening 2006 when it is in the big hit game state. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the start port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the start port 2004, a 15-round jackpot information output signal, a 5-round jackpot information output signal, a 2-round jackpot information output signal, an information output signal during probability fluctuation, special Various information (game information) signals related to the game, such as a symbol display information output signal, a normal symbol display information output signal, a time saving / medium information output information, and a start opening winning information output signal, are output to the payout control board 633.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92). In the peripheral control board command transmission process, transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. The transmission information includes a command for instructing the execution of the effect by the effect display device 1600, a movable body, and the like, and a command for notifying the game state and the occurrence of an error.

Finally, the main control MPU executes register switching (return) (step S96), and ends the main control side timer interrupt processing. Here, when the timer interrupt process on the main control side is started, the main control MPU hardware-saves the contents of the general-purpose register to the stack area. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main processing on the main control side from being destroyed. In the process of step S96, the contents saved in the stack area are read and written to the original register. The main control MPU sets interrupt enable after the processing of step S96.

[8-3. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for controlling a special symbol and a special electric accessory. The special symbol and the special electric accessory control process are executed in the process of step S86 in the main control side timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 119. Hereinafter, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are collectively referred to as a starting port. In addition, the first major winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2006 are collectively referred to as a large winning opening. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are collectively called a special symbol.

In the special symbol and special electric accessory control process, the game ball is accepted into the starting port, that is, the start winning is triggered (establishment of the starting condition), and each start memory information (starting information) for which this starting condition is satisfied is a big hit. A random number for determination is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the random number for jackpot determination matches the jackpot determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (lottery means). Then, it is determined whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state based on the lottery result, and if the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (predetermined winning conditions are satisfied), it is normal. Shift from the game state to the jackpot game state. Hereinafter, the procedure of the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 120.

When the special symbol and the special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first determines whether or not the game ball B has won a prize in the large winning opening (step S100). When the game ball B wins the big prize opening (the result of step S100 is "yes"), the big winning opening winning designation command is set (step S102).

Subsequently, the main control MPU determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize at the starting port (step S112). Whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the start port is detected by the first start port sensor 3002 or the second start port sensor 2511 in the switch input process (step S74) in the main control side timer interrupt process (FIG. 119). It is performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM by reading the presence or absence of a signal.

When the game ball wins a prize in the start opening (the result of step S114 is "yes"), the main control MPU executes the start opening winning process (step S116). In the start opening winning process, a starting opening winning command to be transmitted when a new game ball is won in the starting opening is set, a random number for jackpot judgment is extracted and stored in a predetermined area, and a special symbol is used. It executes processing for executing the look-ahead effect.

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes the corresponding process based on the special symbol / electric accessory operation number, which is a game progress state variable in which the type of branch process executed according to the progress of the game is specified (step). S124). The game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed according to the progress of the game. In the process of step S124, the process shifts to the branch process specified based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area, and when the transferred branch process is completed, the special symbol and the special electric accessory control are performed. End the process. Since the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information, it is backed up in the power cutoff process on the main control side.

In the process of step S130, special symbol change waiting process (step S130), special symbol changing process (step S132), special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), as branching process, based on the value of the game progress state variable. Special symbol loss stop processing (step S136), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S138), big winning opening pre-opening interval processing (step S140), big winning opening opening processing (step S142), big winning opening closing processing (step) S144) or the large winning opening opening end interval process (step S146) is executed.

In the special symbol change waiting process (step S130), a process of starting the change display of the special symbol on the special symbol display is performed based on the fact that the game ball B has entered the start opening.

In the special symbol changing process (step S132), a process for controlling the variation display of the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol jackpot determination process (step S134), it is determined whether or not the special symbol that has been confirmed and stopped causes the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the game ball has entered the start opening.

In the special symbol loss stop process (step S136), a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed when the big hit game state is not generated. In the special symbol big hit stop process (step S138), when a big hit game state is generated, a process of stopping the variation display of the special symbol and notifying the fact is performed.

In the interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S140), a process for generating a big hit game state and notifying that the big hit operation is started is performed. In the big winning opening opening process (step S142), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter each big winning opening is performed by opening the big winning opening.

In the processing during closing of the large winning opening (step S144), processing related to the big hit operation that makes it difficult for the game ball to enter each large winning opening is performed by changing the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state. In the winning opening opening end interval process (step S146), when the jackpot operation is completed, a process for notifying that fact is performed.

[8-4. Special symbol change waiting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol change waiting process (step S130) in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described. FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol change waiting process. The special symbol change waiting process is executed in a state where the change display of the special symbol is not executed, and when the change display is suspended, preparations are made to start the change display of the special symbol.

The main control MPU first determines whether or not the change of the special symbol is suspended (step S420). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is not 0. In addition, when a plurality of start ports are provided, the number of special symbol operation hold balls is stored for each start port. If the change of the special symbol is not reserved (the result of step S420 is "no"), the change display of the special symbol is not started, so this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the variable display of the special symbol is suspended (the result of step S420 is "yes"), the main control MPU sets the reserved ball number designation command as the command data (step S438).

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes a special symbol / flag setting process (step S442). In the special symbol / flag setting process, a special lottery is executed based on a random number for determining a big hit acquired at the time of winning a prize at the start opening.

Further, the main control MPU executes a special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444). In the special symbol variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern is set based on the result of the special lottery. Details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 122.

Next, the main control MPU creates a variation pattern command to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Specifically, first, as a command value, the high-order byte of the special symbol variation pattern reference command corresponding to the special symbol identification flag is set (step S452). Further, the fluctuation pattern value stored in the fluctuation pattern area is set as lower-level command data (step S458). Further, by acquiring the variation type type value from the variation type type area (step S460) and adding the variation type type value to the command value set in the process of step S452, the upper byte of the variation pattern command according to the variation type. Is calculated (step S462). The command data of the variation pattern command created in this way is stored in a predetermined area.

Subsequently, the main control MPU sets a symbol type command for transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S466). Further, a variable state specification command is set in the command buffer (step S474).

Each command created by the above process is set in the command buffer. The reserved ball number designation command set in the command buffer is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S92) in the timer interrupt process on the main control side.

[8-5. Special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process]
Subsequently, the details of the special symbol variation pattern setting process (step S444) in the special symbol variation waiting process will be described. The special symbol variation pattern setting process is a process for setting a variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol. FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the special symbol variation pattern setting process.

First, the main control MPU acquires the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation (step S530). The number of balls on hold for special symbol operation is stored in the buffer for the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation. Further, the main control MPU sets the jackpot flag from the jackpot flag area (step S538).

Then, the main control MPU executes a variation pattern selection determination process for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol based on the number of balls on hold for special symbol operation and the jackpot flag (step S542). The details of the variation pattern selection determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 123.

Next, the main control MPU acquires the variation pattern value extracted by the variation pattern selection determination process (step S544). Then, the data (variable time value) corresponding to the fluctuation pattern value is searched from the special symbol fluctuation time data (step S546).

Further, the main control MPU executes a variation type determination process for selecting a variation type defined in the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol (step S548). The variation type type value acquired by the variation type determination process is set (step S550).

Subsequently, the main control MPU searches for the fluctuation time addition value corresponding to the fluctuation type type value from the fluctuation time addition value data (step S552). The variable time addition value is the addition time corresponding to the variation type, and corresponds to, for example, the addition time according to the number of pseudo-reams. Then, the main control MPU adds the variable time addition value searched in the process of step S552 to the reference variable time value searched in the process of step S546, and acquires the final variable time (step S554). .. Finally, the final fluctuation time is stored in the special symbol / electric accessory operation timer area (step S556), and the special symbol fluctuation pattern setting process is completed.

[8-6. Fluctuation pattern selection judgment processing]
Subsequently, the details of the variation pattern selection determination process (step S542) will be described. FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variation pattern selection determination process. The variation pattern selection determination process is a process for selecting a variation pattern in the variation display of a special symbol.

The main control MPU first acquires a variation information source table based on the variation table number (step S340). The variable table number is a value for selecting (acquiring) the variable information source table from the variable information source address table. The fluctuation information source table includes hit (hit fluctuation selection information status table), miss (missing fluctuation selection information status table), reach (reach fluctuation selection information status table), and reach probability (special symbol reach probability) according to the game state. A data table in which table information for referencing a table) and a variation type (variation type determination data table) is stored.

Subsequently, the main control MPU acquires a winning determination value for deriving the result of the special lottery (step S346). By determining whether or not the hit determination value matches the jackpot value, it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won (step S350). If the jackpot is won (the result of step S350 is "yes"), the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type are acquired (step S354).

Next, the main control MPU executes the variation information number search process based on the jackpot flag and the jackpot symbol type (step S358). In the variation information number search process, the variation information number for determining the hit-time variation pattern selection value data table is acquired from the jackpot variation selection information type table. The main control MPU acquires a random number 1 for a variation pattern from the jackpot variation selection information type table based on the acquired variation information number (step S360).

On the other hand, if the main control MPU has not won a big hit or a small hit (the result of step S350 is "no"), the main control MPU determines whether or not to generate a reach in the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step). S372).

When the main control MPU does not generate reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is "no"), the main control MPU acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the out-of-bounds fluctuation selection information reservation table based on the number of reserved balls (step). S376).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU generates reach in the fluctuation display (the result of step S372 is “yes”), the main control MPU acquires the random number 1 for the fluctuation pattern from the reach fluctuation selection information status table based on the status flag. (Step S382).

Subsequently, the main control MPU executes the variation information number search process based on the random number 1 for the variation pattern acquired in the processes of step S360, step S378, or step S382 (step S388). Then, the variation pattern selection value data table is acquired by the variation information number search process, and the random number 2 for the variation pattern is acquired from the variation pattern selection value data table (step S392). Further, the variation information number search process is executed based on the variation pattern random number 2 and the variation pattern selection value data table (step S394). A variation pattern is selected based on the result of the variation information number search process (step S396), and this process is terminated.

In the present embodiment, the variation pattern is selected in two steps by two types of random numbers, the random number 1 for the variation pattern (step S386) and the random number 2 for the variation pattern (step S392). First, the type of variation pattern (variation pattern group such as XX reach) is selected based on the random number 1 for variation pattern. Further, a variation pattern (value set in the variation pattern command) to be finally varied is selected from the variation pattern group selected by the variation pattern random number 1 based on the variation pattern random number 2. The method is not limited to the method of drawing in two stages, and a method of drawing in three or more stages may be used, or a random number for one variation pattern may be used to directly select the variation pattern.

[9. Various control processes for peripheral control boards]
Next, the processing of the peripheral control board 1510 that receives various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the peripheral control unit. FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing.

[9-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described with reference to FIG. 124. When the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control unit 1511 performs the processing when the peripheral control unit is turned on by executing the staging control program. The peripheral control MPU executes the initial setting process when the peripheral control unit power-on processing is started (step S1000). In the initial setting process, a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a process of determining hot start / cold start, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like are performed.

The peripheral control MPU first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU should be initialized in an extremely short time. Can be done. As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, commands and pachinko related to control of game effects output from the main control board 1310. It is in a state where it can receive various commands such as commands related to the state of the machine 1. Further, in the initial setting process, the image RAM is initialized by writing, for example, "0" to the storage area of the image RAM.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In the current time information acquisition process, for example, calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the RTC held by the peripheral control unit 1511, and the current calendar information is stored in the peripheral control RAM. And set as the current time information.

The peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later, and when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, the value 1 and the peripheral control unit steady processing are set. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V-blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control unit V-blank signal executed when a V-blank signal indicating that screen data from the display control MPU can be accepted is input from the VDP. The value 1 is set in the interrupt processing.

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not a value 1 (value is 0), the process returns to step S1008 again to repeatedly determine whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value 1. By repeating such a determination, it becomes a state of waiting until the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed (the result of step S1008 is “YES”), the peripheral control MPU first performs the steady processing flag SP-FLG. Is set to the value 1 (step S1009). The steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the interrupt timer activation process, an interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and a timer for counting the number of times this interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set in the interrupt execution count STN, and the timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing (FIG. 125).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation unit monitoring process (step S1012). In the operation unit monitoring process, in the operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process described later, the presence or absence of operation of each operation means is monitored based on the detection signals from various sensors provided in the staging operation unit 300 or the like. , Whether or not to reflect in the game production is appropriately determined.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the lamp data output process (step S1014). In the lamp data output process, for example, a game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 created by the lamp data creation process. Output side emission data.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the display data output process (step S1016). In the display data output process, the drawing data for one screen (one frame) generated on the image RAM in the display data creation process is output to the effect display device 1600.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the effect control program outputs the music and sound effects created in the sound data creation process, as well as sound data such as notification sounds and notification sounds, to the sound source IC as serialized audio data.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the scheduler update process (step S1020). In the scheduler update process, schedule data that indicates the timing to output screen data, light emission data, sound data, drive data of a movable body, etc. is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, the display control MPU instructs the VDP to output the screen data from the first screen data among the screen data arranged in the time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. To update the pointer.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the received command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, the peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving means) (command analysis means). The peripheral control MPU recognizes the game state and executes the corresponding effect according to the analysis result of the received command.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes warning processing (step S1024). In the warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified into the notification display, screen generation schedule data and light emission mode generation for executing various abnormality notifications are performed. Schedule data for sound generation, schedule data for sound generation, schedule data for electrical drive source, etc. are set. In the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the order of the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the remaining abnormality notification is automatically transferred. It is designed to do. This allows multiple anomalies to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that another anomaly has occurred and that one anomaly has occurred after one anomaly has occurred but before the anomaly has been resolved. Can be done.

Next, the peripheral control MPU executes the RTC acquisition information update process (step S1026). In the RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 are updated. The RTC acquisition information update process updates the hour, minute, and second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, and further updates the date, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the lamp data creation process (step S1028). In the lamp data creation process, the game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards is created.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the display data creation process (step S1030). In the display data creation process, screen data for output to the effect display device 1600 is created. The peripheral control unit MPU transmits control data (display command) corresponding to the effect to be executed to the display control MPU, and the display control MPU analyzes the control data (display command). Further, the display control MPU extracts the first screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control MPU from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP, and then the screen data following the first screen data. Is extracted from the display control ROM and output to VDP. When the screen data is input, the VDP extracts at least one sprite character from the image ROM based on the input screen data and creates sprite data from the extracted at least one sprite character, and the effect display device 1600. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be displayed in is generated on the image RAM (corresponding to the line buffer).

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the sound data creation process (step S1032). In the sound data creation process, by extracting sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the sound ROM and controlling the built-in sound source, music and sound effects, etc. are produced according to the track number specified in the sound command data. Incorporate sound data and set the output channel to be used according to the output channel number.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes a backup process (step S1034). In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup area and backed up.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the WDT clear process (step S1036). In the WDT clear process, a clear signal is output to the built-in WDT and the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Finally, the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as the execution of the steady processing of the peripheral control unit is completed (step S1038), and returns to the processing of step S1006 again. Then, the value 0 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG and initialized, and the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. When it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are executed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the interval at which the V blank signal is input is approximately 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms). ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[9-2. Peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed every time the interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. 12542 will be described. The peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is performed every (interval between V blank signals being input) / n [ms] (n is a natural number). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is performed every n = 32, that is, about 1.04 ms.

When the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU first determines whether or not the timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (step S1100). The timer interrupt execution count STN is the number of times that the interrupt timer is activated in the interrupt timer activation process (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit power-on processing (FIG. 124) and the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is executed. It is a counter to count. In the present embodiment, as described above, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms. Therefore, the interrupt timer is started in the interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit steady processing. Is started, the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is executed only 32 times before the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed.

When the timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100 (the result of step S1100 is "NO"), that is, when the 33rd timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is started. , The peripheral control MPU ends the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing as it is.

On the other hand, when the timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 (the result of step S1100 is “YES”), the peripheral control MPU adds a value 1 to the timer interrupt execution count STN (step S1102). Timer interrupt execution count By adding a value of 1 to STN, the number of times the interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is executed in the interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010) of the peripheral control unit power-on processing is 1. It will increase by the number of times.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the movable body information acquisition process (step S1104). In the movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, original position history information, movable position) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided on the game board 5 are input. Create history information, etc.). From this created history information, it is possible to acquire the original position, the movable position, and the like of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation unit information acquisition process (step S1106). In the operation unit information acquisition process, the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, the center pressing operation unit 303a) is determined by determining whether or not the detection signals from the various sensors provided in the staging operation unit 300 are input. And the operation history information of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, etc.) are created. From this history information, it is possible to acquire the presence / absence of operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU executes the motor and solenoid drive processing (step S1108). In the motor and solenoid drive processing, among the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in chronological order, the game board decorative drive board, the frame decorative drive board, and the effect drive are according to the drive data indicated by the pointer. It drives an electrical drive source such as a board motor or solenoid.

Finally, the peripheral control MPU executes the drawing state acquisition process (S1110). Further, a backup process is executed (step S1112), and this process is terminated. In the backup process, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU and the external peripheral control RAM are copied to the backup area and backed up.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit timer interrupt process, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effect of steps S1104 to S1108 in a period of about 1.04 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing, the effect is advanced by executing various processes related to the effects of steps S1012 to S1032 in a period of about 33.3 ms. Further, as described above, the peripheral control unit timer interrupt processing is controlled not to be executed 33 times or more by counting the timer interrupt execution number STN while the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed once. Therefore, it is possible to surely match the progress state of the production.

The peripheral control MPU acquires information about the game (special lottery result, current game progress, etc.) from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) while such processing progress is performed, and the acquisition thereof. It is designed to control various effects based on the information provided. As the control related to these effects, in the effect display device 1600, an effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation time determined by the main control board 1310 may appear, or a special effect image may appear during the jackpot game. In addition, moving any (or a plurality of appropriate decorative bodies) of various decorative bodies arranged on the game board 5, including the staging display device 1600, or any of those decorative bodies (or any of these decorative bodies). Alternatively, it also includes making a plurality of appropriate decorative objects) emit light.

When the game area 5a includes a plurality of effect display devices 1600, the peripheral control MPU and the display control MPU according to this embodiment are the plurality of effect display devices as one of the controls related to various effects. In the 1600, it is possible to control the appearance of a specific effect image straddling the display surface of each effect display device 1600, or to control the appearance of different effect images on the two display surfaces. ..

Further, the peripheral control MPU according to this embodiment is one of the controls related to various effects, such as executing the above-mentioned specific movable effect, or various decorative objects during the period when the specific movable effect is performed. It is possible to make the upper front movable decorative body 3350, which is one of them, emit light.

Further, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 may be provided integrally with the liquid crystal display device 3600.

[10. Operation judgment processing in various pressing operation units]
An example of the operation determination process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 130. Hereinafter, an example of the pressing operation determination processing at the time of pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a will be described, but the operation determination processing is the operation determination at the time of operating another pressing operation unit such as the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b or the touch panel. It may be applied to the process.

[10-1. Work area to store detection flags]
FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the transition of the bit string in the work area of the peripheral control RAM, which holds the detection history of the press detection sensor 381. The work area 1261 is a 32-bit work area secured in the peripheral control RAM, and holds the detection history by the press detection sensor 381.

The peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 in the peripheral control RAM, for example, in the first step S1106 in the first peripheral control unit steady processing, or before the first step S1106. The initial value of the bit string of the work area 1261 is, for example, a state in which all the bits of the bit string are 0. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the "cycle" simply means a cycle in which timer interrupt processing is executed (in this embodiment, about 1.04 ms). Further, hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the "frame period" indicates the input interval of the V blank signal, that is, the period during which the image of one frame is updated (in the present embodiment, about 33.3 ms). do.

In step S1106, the peripheral control MPU acquires the detection information by the press detection sensor 381 and generates a detection flag indicating whether or not the press is detected. That is, the peripheral control MPU acquires the detection information by the press detection sensor 381 every cycle and generates the press detection flag. When the detection flag is ON, it indicates that the pressing is detected, and when the detection flag is OFF, it indicates that the pressing is not detected.

Further, in step S1106, the peripheral control MPU shifts the bit string of the work area 1261 to the right by 1 bit, and stores the detection flag generated in the first bit from the left. That is, the work area 1261 holds the detection history of the press detection sensor 381 in each cycle of the last 32 cycles (about 33.3 ms). Therefore, the work area 1261 retains all the detection history of the press detection sensor 381 in the latest frame at the time of frame update.

Further, the detection histories in each bit of the work area 1261 are arranged from the left in order from the newest one. The work area 1261 may be configured so that the detection histories in each bit are arranged in order from the newest one.

An example of the transition of the bit string of the work area 1261 in FIG. 126 will be described. First, the work area 1261 holds the initial value. Since the press is detected by the press detection sensor 381 in the first cycle of F1 (first frame), 1 is stored in the first bit from the left in the bit string of the work area 1261 in the first cycle of F1 and is stored in the other bits. Is stored in 0.

Subsequently, the pressing was detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 in the second cycle of F1 and the third cycle of F1, and then the pressing was not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 in F1. Therefore, in the bit string of the work area 1261 at the end of F1 (at the time of frame update), 1 is stored in the 1st bit from the right, the 2nd bit from the right, and the 3rd bit from the right, and 0 is stored in the other bits. Has been done. The work area 1261 at the end of F1 shows the detection history of the entire F1.

Subsequently, since the pressing was detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 in the first cycle of F2 (the next frame of F1), the first bit from the left and the first bit from the right in the bit string of the work area 1261 in the first cycle of F2. 1 is stored in the eye and the second bit from the right, and 0 is stored in the other bits. In the bit string of the work area 1261 in the first cycle of F2, the first bit from the left shows the detection history in F2, and the other bits show the detection history in F1.

Subsequently, since the pressing was detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 in the second cycle of F2, in the bit string of the work area 1261 in the second cycle of F2, the first bit from the left, the second bit from the left, and the first bit from the right. 1 is stored in the eye, and 0 is stored in the other bits. In the bit string of the work area 1261 in the second cycle of F2, the first bit from the left and the second bit from the right indicate the detection history in F2, and the other bits indicate the detection history in F1.

Although the details will be described later, the peripheral control MPU refers to the work area 1261 after the end of the latest frame and before the acquisition of the detection history of the first cycle of the next frame of the latest frame (for example, step S1012 of the next frame). Then, the operation determination for determining whether or not the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed in the nearest frame is executed.

The length of the bit string of the work area 1261 in the present embodiment is the minimum value of the length that can store the entire detection history of the press detection sensor 381 in one frame, that is, the total number of cycles in one frame ((frame cycle) / (cycle)). ), The same 32 bits. Since the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits, the peripheral control MPU can fully utilize the detection history in the latest frame in the operation determination. The length of the bit string of the work area 1261 may be 33 bits or more, but from the viewpoint of saving the memory capacity of the peripheral control RAM, the length of the bit string of the work area 1261 is preferably 32 bits. ..

When the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits, the work area 1261 after the end of the latest frame and before the acquisition of the detection history of the first cycle of the next frame of the latest frame has only the detection history by the press detection sensor 381 of the entire latest frame. To hold. At this time, the peripheral control MPU refers to all the bit strings in the work area and executes the pressing determination in the latest frame.

On the other hand, when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 33 bits or more, the peripheral control MPU refers, for example, only 32 bits from the left of the work area 1261 (that is, the detection history of the latest frame) to determine the operation in the latest frame. To execute. Further, even when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 33 bits or more, if the peripheral control MPU returns the work area 1261 to the initial value after executing the operation determination, the peripheral control MPU refers to all the bits of the bit string of the work area 1261. , The pressing determination in the latest frame can be executed.

Therefore, from the viewpoint of reducing the processing amount, it is desirable that the length of the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits, that is, a length that can store the entire detection history of the press detection sensor 381 in one frame.

[10-2 Pressing operation determination processing using one pressing detection sensor]
FIG. 127A is a timing chart showing an example of the pressing operation determination process in F1 to F3 (F3 is the frame next to F2). FIG. 127A is an example in which the pressing detection sensor 381 detects continuous pressing for three or more cycles in F1.

In step S1012 in each frame, the peripheral control MPU executes an operation determination for determining whether or not a press is detected by the press detection sensor 381 continuously for three or more cycles in the latest frame. Specifically, for example, the peripheral control MPU searches the bit string of the work area 1261 and determines whether or not the bit string "111" is included. The condition of 3 cycles or more of the determination may be a condition of n cycles or more (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles of one frame (32 in this embodiment)).

It should be noted that the smaller n is, the more erroneous judgment results are determined that the false detection caused by chattering, noise, etc. is due to the operation by the player, while the operation by the player is performed even if the pressure detection sensor detects it. The number of erroneous judgment results that are judged not to be present is reduced. Similarly, the larger n is, the less the erroneous judgment result that the erroneous detection caused by chattering, noise, etc. is determined to be due to the operation by the player, while the operation by the player is performed even if the pressure detection sensor detects it. The number of erroneous judgment results that are judged not to be lost increases. However, it is very unlikely that false positives due to noise or chattering will occur continuously for 3 cycles (about 3.12 ms) or more, so it is desirable that n is 3 or more. Further, under the condition that n is 3 or more, n is set to 3 in the present embodiment in order to reduce an erroneous determination result that the player does not perform the operation even if the pressure detection sensor detects it. ..

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is included, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is not included, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF. When the operation determination flag is ON, it indicates that the central pressing operation unit 303a has been pressed while the pressing operation unit is in the lowered position in the nearest frame. When the operation determination flag is OFF, it indicates that the pressing operation unit was not in the descending position in the nearest frame, or the central pressing operation unit 303a was not pressed even if the pressing operation unit was in the descending position.

When the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON and the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the operation enabled state, a predetermined button is used in steps S1028 to S1032 of the peripheral control unit steady processing in the frame. You may perform the production. The button effect is, for example, display of a predetermined image on the effect display device 1600, output of a predetermined sound from various speakers, light emission of a predetermined pattern from various LEDs, operation (vibration, etc.) of each operation unit, and the like. include. The state of the various operation units is set to the operation valid state in, for example, the first step S1012.

If the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON, the central pressing operation unit 303a is in the operation enabled state, and the operation instruction effect is generated in the latest frame, the peripheral control MPU is concerned. In steps S1028 to S1032 and the like of the peripheral control unit steady processing in the frame, preparations are made to execute the operation-corresponding effect in place of or in addition to the button effect. The peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect in steps S1014 to S1018 of the peripheral control unit steady processing in the frame after the preparation for execution of the operation corresponding effect is completed. In the present embodiment, the operation preparation for executing the operation effect is completed in one frame, but the operation support effect execution preparation and the operation support effect may be executed over a plurality of frames.

The operation instruction effect is an effect that urges the player to operate the effect operation unit 300, and for example, a message such as "press the center button!" Is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The operation-compatible effect is an effect that occurs when the player operates the effect operation unit 300 according to the operation instruction effect, and indicates, for example, whether or not an advantageous game state is generated, the degree of expectation that the advantageous game state is generated, and the like.

The peripheral control MPU may set the operation determination flag to OFF if the current operation determination flag is ON before executing the operation determination in step S1012. In this case, in step S1012, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON when it is determined that the bit string "111" is included, and sets the operation determination flag when it is determined that the bit string "111" is not included. It does not change.

In the example of FIG. 127A, the pressing is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 continuously for three or more cycles in F1. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation correspondence effect execution preparation in F2.

Subsequently, in F2, no pressing is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. Further, in the example of FIG. 127A, since the preparation for executing the operation corresponding effect is completed in F2, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation corresponding effect from F3.

By generating the detection history by the press detection sensor 381 for each cycle, the peripheral control MPU does not miss the detection history regardless of the operation timing of the staging operation unit 300 by the player. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU uses the detection history generated by the press detection sensor 381 generated for each cycle to execute the operation determination, so that the operation determination flag is executed even though the player operates the staging operation unit 300. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the flag is turned off, and by extension, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, the peripheral control MPU is less than the total number of cycles in one frame (32 in the present embodiment) when the pressing is continuously detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 in one frame for n cycles or more (n is 2 or more and the total number of cycles in one frame is less than 32). By turning on the operation determination flag (integer), it is possible to suppress an error in the operation determination due to an erroneous detection of the press detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering, and by extension, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. can.

FIG. 127B is a timing chart showing another example of the pressing operation determination process. FIG. 127A is an example in which the pressing detection sensor 381 detects continuous pressing for three or more cycles in F1 a plurality of times.

In the example of FIG. 127B, the pressing is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 continuously for three or more cycles in F1. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. The description of the effect state is the same as that of FIG. 127A, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

At this time, the peripheral control unit MPU does not necessarily have to search all of the bit strings in the search for the bit strings of the work area 1261 in the operation determination in step S1012 of F2. When the peripheral control MPU detects even one bit string "111", the operation determination flag may be set to ON and the operation determination process may be terminated. By this processing, the processing amount related to the operation determination can be reduced.

In the example of FIG. 127B, when the peripheral control MPU searches for the bit string of the work area 1261 in the order of newest time in the operation determination of step S1012 of F2, the bit string " 111 "is detected. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the determination flag to ON when the bit string is detected, and ends the operation determination process.

FIG. 127C is a timing chart showing another example of the pressing operation determination process. FIG. 127C is an example in which the press detection sensor 381 detects a continuous press for two cycles in F1, and further detects a continuous press for three cycles across F1 and F2.

In the example of FIG. 127C, in F1, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect continuous pressing for three or more cycles. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the peripheral control unit MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2, the effect state in F2 is continuously the operation instruction effect from F1.

Further, in the example of FIG. 127C, in F2, the pressing is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 only in the first cycle and the second cycle. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3.

In addition, unlike F1 and F2 in the example of FIG. 127C, when the pressing detection is not performed continuously for 3 cycles or more in each of the two frames, but the pressing detection is performed continuously for 3 cycles or more across the two frames. , Peripheral control MPU may set the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of the next frame (F3 in the example of FIG. 127C) of the two frames. Hereinafter, in such a case, an example of the operation determination process for setting the operation determination flag to ON will be described.

A specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 32 bits will be described. When the peripheral control MPU stores the bit string "11" consisting of 2 bits in the peripheral control RAM when the 3 bits from the left of the bit string of the work area 1261 are "110" at the time of operation determination, the peripheral control MPU stores the bit string "11" consisting of 2 bits in the peripheral control RAM. When it is "10", the bit string "1" consisting of 1 bit is stored in the peripheral control RAM. Then, in the next operation determination, the peripheral control MPU may search for the 33-bit or 34-bit bit string in which the stored bit string is added to the right side of the bit string of the work area 1261.

Further, a specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 33 bits will be described. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string is "1" and the third bit from the left is "0" at the time of operation determination, the peripheral control MPU determines the bit string "1" consisting of one bit. Stored in the peripheral control RAM. Then, in the next operation determination, the peripheral control MPU searches for 34 bit strings in which the stored bit strings are added to the right side of the bit strings in the work area 1261. Further, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string of the work area 1261 is "0" at the time of the operation determination, the first bit to the 33rd bit from the left is determined in the next operation determination. The bit string consisting of up to (that is, the bit string of the work area 1261) may be searched.

Further, a specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 34 bits will be described. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string is "1" and the third bit from the left is "0" in the operation determination, the peripheral control MPU determines that the third bit from the left is "0", and in the next operation determination, the peripheral control MPU is 1 from the left. The bit string consisting of the bits to the 34th bit (that is, the bit string of the work area 1261) may be searched. Further, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the second bit from the left of the bit string is "0" at the time of operation determination, the bit string consisting of the first bit to the 33rd bit from the left in the next operation determination. Just search for.

Further, a specific example of the operation determination process when the bit string of the work area 1261 is 35 bits or more will be described. When the value of the 34th bit from the left is "1" and the value of the 35th bit from the left is "0", the peripheral control MPU is for a bit string consisting of the 1st bit to the 34th bit from the left. To make an operation judgment. Further, when the value of the 34th bit from the left is "0", the peripheral control MPU performs an operation determination on the bit string consisting of the 1st bit to the 33rd bit from the left. By these processes, the peripheral control MPU can set the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F3 in the example of FIG. 127C.

[10-3. Pressing operation judgment processing using multiple pressing detection sensors]
In the above example, an example in which one press detection sensor and one press detection piece are attached to the staging operation unit 300 has been described, but a plurality of press detection sensors and a plurality of press detection pieces are attached to the staging operation unit 300. It may have been. Hereinafter, an example of the pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors will be described.

FIG. 128 is a plan view of the staging operation unit 300 to which a plurality of pressure detection sensors and a plurality of pressure detection pieces are attached as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the staging operation unit button unit. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the lower part of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361, and includes pressure detection sensors 381a to 381c for detecting the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303.

Further, the central button main body 373 includes press detection pieces 373h to 373j protruding downward from the bottom portion 373b of the central button main body 373. The press detection pieces 373h to 373j are detected by the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, respectively.

The arrangement of the pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c in the plan view of the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the arrangement of the pressing detection pieces 373h to 373j in the plan view of the bottom portion 373b of the center button main body 373 are examples of FIG. 128. May be different from. The position that the player is likely to touch when pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a differs depending on the installation position and inclination of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pachinko machine 1, the design of the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the like.

For example, the more the installation position of the central pressing operation unit 303a is to the left of the center of the front left and right of the door frame 3, the more the player can press the central pressing operation unit 303a, the more the center of the plan view of the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a. It is more likely to touch the right side. Similarly, the more the installation position of the central pressing operation unit 303a is to the right of the center of the front left and right of the door frame 3, the more the player sees the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a in a plan view when the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed. It is likely to touch the left side of the center.

Further, for example, when the central pressing operation unit 303a is installed at an angle, that is, when the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a is not horizontal, the player can press the central pressing operation unit 303a on the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a. There is a high possibility of touching a position where the height in the vertical direction is high. Further, for example, when a mark such as "PUSH!" Is written on the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a, the player presses the central pressing operation unit 303a, and the player puts the mark on the mark. Most likely to touch.

For example, it is desirable that at least one pressing detection sensor is arranged directly below in the pressing direction at a position where the player is likely to touch the central pressing operation unit 303a when pressed. Further, from the viewpoint of improving the pressing detection accuracy, for example, it is desirable that the larger the area of the central pressing operation unit 303a, the more dispersed the arrangement of the pressing detection sensors in the plan view.

In the example of FIG. 128, three press detection sensors and three press detection pieces are attached to the staging operation unit 300, but even if two or four or more press detection sensors and press detection pieces are attached. good. From the viewpoint of improving the pressing detection accuracy, it is desirable that, for example, the larger the area of the central pressing operation unit 303a, the more pressing detection sensors can be attached. By providing the staging operation unit 300 with a plurality of pressure detection sensors, it is possible to reduce the pressure detection omission when the player presses the central pressing operation unit 303a, and by extension, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. can.

[10-3-1. Pressing operation determination processing using multiple pressing detection sensors (OR determination)]
FIG. 129A is a timing chart showing an example of a pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the drawings after FIG. 129A, "sensor output A" is the output of the press detection sensor 381a, "sensor output B" is the output of the press detection sensor 381b, and "sensor output C" is the output of the press detection sensor 381c. Is shown.

The peripheral control MPU secures a work area 1261 corresponding to each of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c in the peripheral control RAM, for example, in the first step S1106 in the first peripheral control unit steady processing or before the first step S1106. do.

The peripheral control MPU executes, for example, an operation determination for determining whether or not the first condition is satisfied in step S1012 in each frame. The first condition is a condition indicating that the pressing is continuously detected for three or more cycles by at least one of the pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c in the latest frame. The "3 cycles" in the first condition may be "n cycles" (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles in one frame (32 in this embodiment)).

In the determination of the first condition, the peripheral control MPU searches for the bit string of the corresponding work area 1261 for each of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, and determines whether or not the bit string "111" is included.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is included in at least one work area 1261 of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, it determines that the first condition is satisfied and sets the operation determination flag to ON. .. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is not included in all the work areas 1261 of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, the peripheral control MPU determines that the first condition is not satisfied and sets the operation determination flag to OFF.

In the example of FIG. 129A, the pressing is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381a continuously for three or more cycles in F1. Therefore, since the first condition is satisfied in F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation correspondence effect execution preparation in F2.

The priority may be predetermined for the press detection sensors 381a to 381c. At this time, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the first condition is satisfied in order from the press detection sensor having the highest priority. judge. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string "111" is included in the work area 1261 corresponding to a certain press detection sensor, the operation determination flag is set to ON at that time, and the priority is given to the press detection sensor. It is not necessary to perform the operation determination for the low pressure detection sensor.

The operation determination process using the priority order can reduce the amount of processing related to the operation determination. Further, as described above, the positions that the player is likely to touch when pressing the central pressing operation unit 303a are the installation position, inclination, and the central pressing operation unit 303a of the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pachinko machine 1. It depends on the design etc. By setting a high priority for the press detection sensor located near the position where the player is likely to touch the central press operation unit 303a when pressed, the effect of reducing the processing amount related to the operation determination is further increased. Can be done.

FIG. 129B is a timing chart showing an example of a pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 129B, the press detection sensor 381a detects the press in the 4th to 5th cycles of F1, and the press detection sensor 381b detects the press in the 5th to 6th cycles of F1. The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the first condition or the second condition is satisfied in the operation determination in step S1012 in each frame, and turns on the operation determination flag when the first condition or the second condition is satisfied. It may be set and the operation determination flag may be set to OFF when both are not satisfied.

The second condition is that the first pressing sensor, which is one of the pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c, detects the pressing in the a-2nd cycle and the a-1th cycle of the nearest frame (a is 2 or more and 1). The total period of the frame (an integer equal to or less than 32 in this embodiment) and the a-1 of the nearest frame by the second pressing detection sensor which is any of the pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c and is different from the first pressing detection sensor. It is a condition indicating that the pressure is detected in the cycle and the cycle a. That is, in F1 of the example of FIG. 129B, the second condition is satisfied.

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the second condition is satisfied, for example, as follows. The peripheral control MPU searches for the bit string of the corresponding work area 1261 for each of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, and determines whether or not the bit string "110" is included. If all the work areas 1261 do not include the bit string "110", the peripheral control MPU determines that the second condition is not satisfied.

The peripheral control MPU detects the bit string "110" from the work area 1261 corresponding to a certain press detection sensor, and the value of the bit at the same position as the detected bit string in at least one work area 1261 of the other press detection sensor. When it is determined that is "011", it is determined that the second condition is satisfied. If the peripheral control MPU does not detect the bit string "110", or if it determines that the corresponding bit string "011" does not exist for all the detected bit strings "110", the peripheral control MPU determines that the second condition is not satisfied. ..

As described above, in the example of FIG. 129B, since the second condition is satisfied in F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation correspondence effect execution preparation in F2.

When the "three cycles" in the first condition is "n cycle", the second condition is that in the latest frame, the first pressing detection sensor makes the x-cycle continuous, and the second pressing detection sensor makes the y-cycle continuous. (X and y are integers of 2 or more and less than n), part of the x cycle and the y cycle overlap, and the x cycle starts from the earliest time of the start of the x cycle and the start of the y cycle. It is shown that the time until the later time of the end of the y cycle and the end of the y cycle is n cycles.

Further, the second condition at this time is that in the nearest frame, the first pressing sensor detects the pressing continuously for x cycles, and the second pressing detecting sensor detects the pressing continuously for y cycles (x, y are 1 or more and less than n). It is an integer, at least one of x and y is 2 or more, and x + y = n), and from the earliest time of the start of the x cycle and the start of the y cycle, the end of the x cycle and the end of the y cycle. It may be shown that the time to the later time of the time is n cycles.

Even when the peripheral control unit MPU uses the history of a plurality of pressure detection sensors, it is necessary to search all of the bit strings in the bit string of each work area 1261 in the operation determination in step S1012 of F2. There is no. When the peripheral control MPU determines that the operation determination flag is set to ON, the search may be stopped and the operation determination may be terminated.

FIG. 129C is a timing chart showing another example of the pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 129C, the press detection sensor 381a and the press detection sensor 381b detect the press in the same two consecutive cycles of F1. However, since this does not satisfy both the first condition and the second condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2. The effect state in F2 is the same as the operation instruction effect from F1.

Further, in F2, the press detection sensor 381a detects the press in one cycle, the press detection sensor 381b detects the press in the next one cycle, and the press detection sensor 381c is detected by the press detection sensor 381b. The pressing of the next one cycle of the pressing cycle is detected. However, since this also does not satisfy both the first condition and the second condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. The effect state in F3 is the same as the operation instruction effect from F2.

Further, in F3, the press detection sensor 381a detects the press in two cycles, and the press detection sensor 381b detects the press in the next one cycle of the two cycles. However, since this also does not satisfy both the first condition and the second condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F4 (the next frame of F3). The effect state in F4 is the same as the operation instruction effect from F3.

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied in the operation determination in step S1012 in each frame, sets the operation determination flag to ON when the third condition is satisfied, and sets the operation determination flag to ON, and the third condition. If is not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF. The third condition is a condition indicating that the pressing is detected by at least one of the pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c in the latest frame for three consecutive cycles or more.

In the example of FIG. 129C, the third condition is satisfied in F2 and F3. The "3 cycles" in the third condition may be "n cycles" (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles in one frame (32 in this embodiment)).

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the third condition is satisfied, for example, as follows. The peripheral control MPU executes an OR operation on the bits at the same position in the bit strings of the work area 1261 of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, and generates a bit string in which the calculation results are arranged at the corresponding positions. The peripheral control MPU determines that the third condition is satisfied when the bit string obtained from the calculation result includes the bit string "111", and when the bit string obtained from the calculation result does not include the bit string "111", the third condition is satisfied. It is determined that the condition is not satisfied.

By executing the above-mentioned pressing operation determination process using the plurality of pressing detection sensors, the peripheral control MPU can suppress the omission of the pressing detection, and thus can suppress the deterioration of the player's interest. In addition, the pressure detection sensor 381 for chattering, noise, etc., described above, in the order of operation determination using only the first condition, operation determination using the first condition and the second condition, and operation determination using the third condition. It is highly effective in suppressing errors in operation judgment due to false detection. Further, the player operates the staging operation unit 300 in the order of the above-mentioned operation determination using the third condition, the operation determination using the first condition and the second condition, and the operation determination using only the first condition. Despite this, the effect of suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned off is high.

[10-3-2. Pressing operation determination processing using multiple pressing detection sensors (AND determination)]
FIG. 130A is a timing chart showing another example of the pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 130A, the press detection sensor 381a and the press detection sensor 381b detect the press in the same two consecutive cycles of F1. In the example of FIG. 130A, the operation determination is performed according to the fourth condition described later.

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied in the operation determination in step S1012 in each frame, sets the operation determination flag to ON when the fourth condition is satisfied, and sets the operation determination flag to ON, and the fourth condition. If is not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF. The fourth condition is that in the latest frame, pressing is detected in the same continuous three or more cycles by the pressing detection sensors of more than half of the pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c (that is, two or more in this embodiment). It is a condition to show that. In the example of FIG. 130A, the fourth condition is satisfied in F1.

The "3 cycles" in the fourth condition may be "n cycles" (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles in one frame (32 in this embodiment)). Further, "half or more" in the fourth condition may be read as "predetermined ratio or more" or "predetermined number of press detection sensors installed in the staging operation unit 300 or less and 2 or more".

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied, for example, as follows. The peripheral control MPU searches for the bit string of the corresponding work area 1261 for each of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, and determines whether or not the bit string "111" is included. The peripheral control MPU determines that the work area 1261 corresponding to a certain press detection sensor includes the bit string "111", and in at least one work area 1261 of the other press detection sensor, the bit at the same position as the bit string is When it is determined that the value is "111", it is determined that the fourth condition is satisfied.

In the example of FIG. 130A, since the fourth condition is satisfied in F1, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON in step S1012 of F2. Further, since the operation instruction effect is executed in F1, the peripheral control MPU executes the operation correspondence effect execution preparation in F2.

By executing the operation determination using the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU is compared with the operation determination based on the first condition, the second condition, or the third condition described above, and the pressure detection sensor 381 for noise, chattering, etc. It is possible to further suppress the error of the operation determination due to the false detection of. Further, when the fourth condition is used, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to ON only when a plurality of pressure detection sensors simultaneously detect the pressure. Therefore, for example, a foreign substance is found in one pressure detection sensor. Even in the case where the pressure detection sensor is pinched and the pressure detection sensor is always shielded from light, it is possible to suppress erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection. The operation determination using the first condition, the second condition, or the third condition described above is compared with the operation determination using the fourth condition, even though the player operates the staging operation unit 300. , It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned off.

FIG. 130B is a timing chart showing another example of the pressing operation determination process using a plurality of pressing detection sensors. In the example of FIG. 130B, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fourth condition is satisfied in the operation determination of step S1012 in each frame, and sets the operation determination flag to ON when the fourth condition is satisfied. , When the fourth condition is not satisfied, the operation determination flag is set to OFF.

In the example of FIG. 130B, the press detection sensor 381a and the press detection sensor 381b detect the press in the same two consecutive cycles of F1. However, since this does not satisfy the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F2. The effect state in F2 is the same as the operation instruction effect from F1.

Further, in F2, the press detection sensor 381a and the press detection sensor 381b detect the press in the same continuous two cycles, and the press detection sensor 381b and the press detection sensor 381c have one cycle immediately after the same two cycles. The pressure is detected in. However, since this also does not satisfy the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F3. The effect state in F3 is the same as the operation instruction effect from F2.

Further, in F3, the press detection sensor 381a and the press detection sensor 381b detect the press in the same one cycle, and the press detection sensor 381a and the press detection sensor 381c detect the press in the same cycle immediately after the same cycle. The press detection sensor 381b and the press detection sensor 381c detect the press in one cycle immediately after the one cycle immediately after that. However, since this also does not satisfy the fourth condition, the peripheral control MPU sets the operation determination flag to OFF in step S1012 of F4. The effect state in F4 is the same as the operation instruction effect from F3.

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fifth condition is satisfied in the operation determination in step S1012 in each frame, sets the operation determination flag to ON when the fifth condition is satisfied, and sets the fifth condition to ON. If is not satisfied, the operation determination flag may be set to OFF. The fifth condition is a condition indicating that the pressing is detected by more than half of the pressing detection sensors 381a to 381c in the latest frame for three consecutive cycles or more.

In the example of FIG. 130B, the fifth condition is satisfied in F2 and F3. The "3 cycles" in the fifth condition may be "n cycles" (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles in one frame (32 in this embodiment)). Further, "half or more" in the fifth condition may be read as "predetermined ratio or more" or "predetermined number of press detection sensors installed in the staging operation unit 300 or less and 2 or more".

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the fifth condition is satisfied, for example, as follows. The sum is calculated for each of the bits at the same position in the bit string of the work area 1261 of the press detection sensors 381a to 381c, and 1 is calculated if the calculated sum is 2 or more, and 0 is assigned if the calculated sum is 1 or less. Generates a bit string arranged at the position corresponding to the same position.

The peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the generated bit string includes the bit string "111". When the peripheral control MPU determines that the generated bit string contains the bit string "111", the peripheral control MPU determines that the fifth condition is satisfied, and the peripheral control MPU determines that the generated bit string does not include the bit string "111". If so, it is determined that the fifth condition is not satisfied.

The determination using the fifth condition can suppress an error in the operation determination due to an erroneous detection of the press detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering, as compared with the determination using the fourth condition. Further, in the determination using the fourth condition, as compared with the determination using the fifth condition, a situation occurs in which the operation determination flag is turned off even though the player operates the staging operation unit 300. Can be suppressed.

[11. Special effect triggered by the lowering judgment of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit]
An example of the special effect triggered by the lowering determination of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 131 and 132. The special effect described below is not limited to the lowering determination of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, and for example, the ascending determination of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b, the pressing determination of the central pressing operation unit 303a, the contact determination of the touch panel, etc. It may be an opportunity.

FIG. 131 is an explanatory diagram showing "lock the button effect" including an example of the special effect of the present embodiment. "Rock the button effect" is an example of the reach effect during the normal game state. When the "lock the button effect" starts, the display control MPU causes the effect display device 1600 to display the symbol in the reach state according to the instruction of the peripheral control MPU.

Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU drives the operation button elevating drive motor 367 so that the elevating cam member 371 rotates a predetermined amount in the counterclockwise or clockwise direction in a plan view, for example. The pressing operation unit 303b is moved to the ascending position. The peripheral control MPU may drive the operation button elevating drive motor 367 until the ascending detection piece 373g is detected by the ascending detection sensor 376a.

Further, the display control MPU displays characters such as "Lock the button !!" on the effect display device 1600 according to the instruction from the peripheral control MPU. Hereinafter, the state in which the effect for which the operation of the effect operation unit 300 is prompted is executed is referred to as a special effect operation instruction state. The player presses the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b or the central pressing operation unit 303a according to the instruction of "Lock the button !!" to move the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b to the descending position. At this time, the guide pin 364d moves downward along the second cam 371d.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the jackpot winning is announced in the "lock the button effect" and determines that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is, for example, in a plan view. The guide pin 364d is locked to the locking portion 371c by driving the operation button elevating drive motor 367 so as to rotate clockwise by a predetermined amount. That is, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is locked at the lowered position. The operation of locking the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b at the descending position in the "lock button effect" is an example of a special effect.

The details of the method by which the peripheral control MPU determines that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the descending position will be described later. Further, the peripheral control MPU displays, for example, a display effect of displaying a big hit symbol and characters for notifying the big hit winning such as "Big hit! Congratulations !!" on the display control MPU on the display control MPU. Instruct to execute.

Although the details will be described later, in the special effect, the peripheral control MPU determines that the jackpot winning is announced in the "lock the button effect", and determines that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the descending position. It is performed in step S1108 in the cycle of the control timer interrupt process. On the other hand, the execution instruction of the display effect to the display control MPU by the peripheral control MPU is performed, for example, in step S1016 in the peripheral control unit steady processing from the next time onward. In addition to or in addition to the display effect, predetermined sound output from various speakers, light emission of a predetermined pattern from various LEDs, and operation (vibration, etc.) of an operation unit such as the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are executed. You may.

When the big hit non-winning is announced in the "lock the button effect", the peripheral control MPU does not drive the operation button elevating drive motor 367 even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the descending position. That is, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b rises to the ascending position again. Further, for example, after the peripheral control MPU determines that the jackpot non-winning is notified in the "lock button effect" and determines that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the descending position, the peripheral control MPU ascends by the ascending detection sensor 376a. When it is determined that the detection piece 373g has been detected, the display control MPU directs and displays, for example, a symbol for loss and characters indicating that the jackpot has not been won, such as "Sorry ...", in accordance with the instructions of the peripheral control MPU. Displayed on device 1600.

Further, the peripheral control MPU drives the operation button elevating drive motor 367 so as to rotate the elevating cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction by a predetermined amount in a plan view after a predetermined time (for example, 200 ms) of the jackpot non-winning notification has elapsed. By causing the guide pin 364d to be locked to the locking portion 371c. That is, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 moves the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b to the descending position and fixes it. The peripheral control MPU may drive the operation button elevating drive motor 367 until the descent detection piece 370c is detected by the descent detection sensor 382.

If the player ignores the instruction "Lock the button !!" and does not press either the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b or the central pressing operation unit 303a, or the player ignores the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b or the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. If the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed but the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b does not move to the lowering position, the peripheral control MPU does not determine that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the lowering position. At this time, the peripheral control MPU moves the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b to the descending position and fixes it after the elapse of a predetermined time. The method of moving the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b to the descending position and fixing it is as described above.

Not limited to the special effect, the peripheral control MPU determines that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the ascending position (that is, the ascending detection piece 373g is detected by the ascending detection sensor 376a), and a predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b may be moved to the descending position and fixed.

In the above, the operation of locking the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b at the descending position at the time of winning a big hit has been described as an example of a special effect. However, the special effect is, for example, a display of a predetermined image on the effect display device 1600 and various speakers. Includes output of a predetermined voice from, light emission of a predetermined pattern from various LEDs, and operation (vibration, etc.) of an operation unit such as the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, an example in which the special effect is started when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is determined to be in the descending position in the special effect operation instruction state at the time of winning the big hit has been described. This includes operating other operation units such as the operation unit 303a and the touch panel during the special effect operation instruction state.

Further, the special effect is not only an effect of notifying the winning or non-winning of the big hit, but also, for example, an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of the big hit, an effect suggesting the number of rounds of the big hit at the time of winning the big hit, and an effect at the time of winning the big hit. Includes effects that suggest the presence or absence of probable changes in the jackpot.

Further, in the "lock button effect", the display effect is executed after the special effect is executed, but there may be an effect in which only the special effect is executed.

FIG. 132 is a timing chart showing an example of the lowering position determination process of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b by the peripheral control MPU. In the example of FIG. 132, in F1, the descent of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is detected continuously for three or more cycles by the descent detection sensor 382.

The peripheral control MPU secures a work area for storing the detection history by the descent detection sensor 382 in the peripheral control RAM, for example, in the first step S1106 in the first peripheral control unit steady processing or before the first step S1106. do. Hereinafter, the work area is referred to as a special production work area.

The special effect work area is, for example, a work area for storing a bit string consisting of 3 bits or more, and stores a detection flag by the descent detection sensor 382. The initial value of the bit string of the special effect work area is, for example, a state in which all the bits are "0". Further, when the peripheral control MPU secures the work area 1261 of 32 bits or more for storing the detection history by the descent detection sensor 382 in FIG. 126, it is necessary to secure the work area for special staging separately from the work area 1261. However, the work area 1261 is also used as a work area for special production.

The peripheral control MPU updates the special effect work area by executing the same processing as the update of the work area 1261 for the detection information by the descent detection sensor 382 in step S1106 in each cycle. Therefore, when the bit string of the special effect work area is k bits, the special effect work area holds the detection history by the descent detection sensor 382 in the latest k cycle.

Further, the peripheral control MPU executes an elevating cam member operation determination for determining whether or not a descent is continuously detected by the descent detection sensor 382 in, for example, the latest three cycles in step S1106 in each cycle. In the peripheral control MPU, in the elevating cam member operation determination, specifically, with reference to the special effect work area, it is determined whether or not the bit string corresponding to the last three cycles is "111".

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the bit string corresponding to the last three cycles is "111", the peripheral control MPU determines that the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in the descending position. When the peripheral control MPU further determines that the current effect state is the special effect operation instruction state, the peripheral control MPU executes a special effect of locking the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b at the descending position in step S1108, that is, the elevating cam member 371. However, for example, the guide pin 364d is locked to the locking portion 371c by driving the operation button elevating drive motor 367 so as to rotate clockwise by a predetermined amount in a plan view.

That is, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1106 of a certain cycle that the current effect state is the special effect operation instruction state and the descent detection sensor 382 continuously detects the descent in the last three cycles, the next time. Peripheral control unit The elevating cam member 371 is operated in step S1108 of a certain cycle without waiting for the start of steady processing (frame start), and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is locked at the descending position. It is desirable that the peripheral control MPU operates the elevating cam member 371 in step S1108 of the certain cycle, but it is a cycle in the peripheral control unit steady processing to which the certain cycle belongs, and is a cycle after the certain cycle. In step S1108, the elevating cam member 371 may be operated.

As a result, the time from when the player moves the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b to the descending position until the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is locked is shortened, so that the player moves the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b to the descending position. After this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unnatural movement in which the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b slightly rises, and by extension, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. Further, after the player moves the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b to the descending position, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b rises before the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is locked, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is not locked. Suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

The "3 cycles" in the elevating cam member operation determination may be "m cycle" (m is an arbitrary integer). The smaller m is, the more the error in the descent position determination due to the false detection of the descent detection sensor 382 such as noise and chattering increases, while the special effect does not occur even though the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b has moved to the descent position. The occurrence can be suppressed. Similarly, the larger m is, the less the error in the descent position determination due to the false detection of the descent detection sensor 382 such as noise and chattering is reduced, while the special effect is generated even though the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is moved to the descent position. There will be more situations where you do not.

As described above, it is extremely unlikely that false positives due to noise or chattering will occur continuously for 3 cycles (about 3.12 ms) or more, so it is desirable that m is 3 or more. Further, in order to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the special effect does not occur even though the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b has moved to the descending position, m is set to 3. Further, when the "3 cycles" in the elevating cam member operation determination is the "m cycle", the bit string in the special effect work area is m bits or more.

Further, the peripheral control MPU executes the display effect start determination before acquiring the detection history of the first cycle of each frame (for example, step S1012 of each frame). In the display effect start determination, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the descent is detected by the descent detection sensor 382 continuously for three or more cycles in the latest frame, for example, by the same method as the above-mentioned pressing operation determination.

When the peripheral control MPU determines that the descent is detected by the descent detection sensor 382 in the latest frame for three consecutive cycles or more, and determines that the state of the latest frame includes the special effect operation instruction state, the peripheral control MPU determines that the descent is detected in the frame. In steps S1028 to S1032 of the peripheral control unit steady processing, preparations are made to execute the display effect.

The peripheral control MPU may determine whether or not the special effect has been executed in the latest frame in the display effect start determination. If it is determined that the special effect has been executed in the latest frame, the peripheral control MPU may determine whether or not the special effect has been executed. In steps S1028 to S1032 of the control unit steady processing, preparations are made to execute the display effect.

The peripheral control MPU executes the display effect in steps S1014 to S1018 of the peripheral control unit steady processing in the frame after the preparation for executing the display effect is completed. In the example of FIG. 132, it is assumed that the display effect execution preparation is completed in one frame, but the display effect execution preparation and the display effect may be executed over a plurality of frames.

[12. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
In the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU executes whether or not the central pressing operation unit 303a is operated by using the detection history by the pressing detection sensor 381 acquired for each cycle (the cycle in which the timer interrupt processing is executed). By doing so, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned off even though the press detection sensor 381 detects the press, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player. .. Further, the peripheral control MPU is an operation determination flag when the pressing is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 continuously for n cycles or more in the latest frame (n is 2 or more and is an integer less than the total number of cycles of one frame). By turning on, it is possible to suppress an error in operation determination due to an erroneous detection of the press detection sensor 381 such as noise and chattering, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, since the length of the bit string in the work area 1261 that stores the detection history acquired by the press detection sensor 381 for each cycle is the same as the total number of cycles in one frame, the work area 1261 is set at the time of frame update. , The entire detection history of the press detection sensor 381 in the latest frame can be stored, and the memory capacity used for the work area 1261 can be saved.

Further, the staging operation unit 300 may be provided with a plurality of pressure detection sensors, and in this case, it is possible to reduce the pressure detection omission when the player presses the central pressing operation unit 303a, which in turn is of interest to the player. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, in the peripheral control MPU, when the pressing is continuously detected for n cycles or more in any of the plurality of pressing detection sensors, the operation determination flag is set to ON so that the player can perform the central pressing operation unit 303a. It is possible to reduce the occurrence of a situation in which the operation determination flag is turned off despite pressing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Further, the priority may be predetermined for a plurality of press detection sensors 381, and the peripheral control MPU executes the press operation determination in order from the press detection sensor having the highest priority, and turns on the press operation determination flag. When it is determined that the setting is set to, the pressing operation determination in the frame may be stopped. As a result, the amount of processing related to the pressing operation determination can be reduced. Further, by setting a high priority in the pressing detection sensor located near the position where the player is likely to touch the central pressing operation unit 303a when pressed, the effect of reducing the processing amount related to the pressing operation determination can be further reduced. Can be increased.

Further, the peripheral control MPU is a pressing operation determination flag when the pressing is detected in the same continuous n-cycle or more by a plurality of pressing detection sensors having a predetermined ratio or more of the plurality of pressing detection sensors in the latest frame. May be set to ON (n is an integer of 2 or more and less than the total number of cycles in one frame). As a result, the peripheral control MPU can further suppress erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection of pressing due to noise, chattering, etc., and can suppress deterioration of the player's interest. Further, as a result, the peripheral control MPU suppresses erroneous operation determination due to erroneous detection even when a foreign object is caught in one press detection sensor and the press detection sensor is always shielded from light. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the descent is continuously detected by the descent detection sensor 382 in the latest n cycles in each cycle, and the current staging state is the special staging operation instruction state and the latest n. When it is determined that the descent is continuously detected by the descent detection sensor 382 in the cycle, the elevating cam member 371 is operated in step S1108 of the certain cycle without waiting for the start of the next frame, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is lowered. Lock in position. As a result, the time from when the player moves the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b to the descending position until the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is locked is shortened, so that the player moves the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b to the descending position. After this, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an unnatural movement in which the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b slightly rises, and by extension, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to suitable embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and as shown below, various improvements are made without departing from the gist of the present invention. And the design can be changed.

That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko machine or a gaming machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine can be used. It may be applied, and even in this case, the same action and effect as described above can be obtained.

Further, in the above embodiment, as a movable effect unit, a rotating decorative body 3126 which is rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right and has a plurality of (four) decorative portions 3127 which are different from each other in the circumferential direction is formed in the left-right direction. The one provided four coaxially with is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a rotating decorative body in which a plurality of decorative parts that are rotatable around an axis extending vertically and are different from each other in the circumferential direction are formed. It may be equipped with at least one, at least one rotatable decorative body that can rotate around an axis extending back and forth, at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction, and the like. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 which move up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the present invention is limited thereto. A clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between a movable decorative body that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decorative body that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a drive motor.

Further, in the above embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes a housing case 3251, an input member 3252, an output member 3253, and a roller 3254, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation from the drive motor is not limited thereto. A deceleration unit that temporarily decelerates the speed and a speed conversion unit that shifts the decelerated rotation and transmits the decelerated rotation to the output side. It is composed of a first planetary gear mechanism having an impossible fixed ring gear and a second planetary gear mechanism having a second sun gear, a second planetary gear and a rotatable rotary ring gear connected to the first sun gear. , A carrier having support shafts for supporting each is arranged between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism, and the ring is provided between the first planetary gear mechanism and the second planetary gear mechanism. A difference in the number of teeth may be provided between at least one gear of the gear and the sun gear so that the rotation from the drive motor is decelerated and transmitted to the rotary ring gear.

1 Pachinko machine 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 381 Press detection sensor 381a Press detection sensor 381b Press detection sensor 381c Press detection sensor 382 Descent detection sensor 1261 Work area 1310 Main control board 1510 Peripheral control unit 1512 Effect display control unit 1600 Effect display device 3000 Back unit 3300 Upper front movable effect unit 3301 Unit base 3302 Upper front drive motor (drive motor)
3303 1st link rod 3304 2nd link rod (link member)
3305 Upper stopper 3306 Lower stopper 3350 Upper front movable decorative body 3351 Central decorative body (main decorative body)
3352 First protruding decorative body (sub-decorative body unit)
3352a First protruding decorative part (sub-decorative body)
3352b First connecting rod (connecting member)
3352c Link mounting part 3353 Second protruding decorative body (sub-decorative body unit)
3353a Second protruding decoration part (sub-decorative body)
3353b Second connecting rod (connecting member)
3353c link mounting part

Claims (1)

It is provided with a reception that can accept a game ball and a lottery means that can execute a lottery based on the acceptance of the game ball to the reception, and the player can be determined based on the result of the lottery being a specific result. It is a gaming machine that executes advantageous hit games,
A first display means capable of displaying an effect according to the result of the lottery in the display area, and
A second display means arranged in front of the first display means at a predetermined distance, and a second display means.
A movable body made movable so as to cover the display area of the first display means from the standby position to the operation position.
Equipped with
The second display means has a transparent light guide plate and a plurality of light emitting units arranged on one end surface side of the plurality of end faces of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitting unit is the light from the light guide plate. A predetermined pattern appears on the front side of the light guide plate by being incident from one end face side.
The pattern appearing on the front side of the light guide plate has a plurality of embodiments including a first pattern and a second pattern having a different aspect from the first pattern, and the pattern appearing in the plurality of embodiments is the above-mentioned. It is possible to appear by multiple light emitting parts arranged on one end face side,
The first display area of the light guide plate on which the first pattern appears and the second display area of the light guide plate on which the second pattern appears are the light from the light emitting portion arranged on the one end face side. Overlapping in the incident direction of
The first pattern appears in the second display means in the incident region where the light emitting portion that emits light when the first pattern appears in the second display means receives light from the end face of the second display means. The first display area is smaller than the end face side picture area projected onto the end face of the second display means provided with the light emitting portion capable of appearing the first picture.
By causing the patterns including the first pattern and the second pattern to emit light in a specific order, the movement is such that the light guide plate provided with the light emitting portion is separated from the one end face side . A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute the light emission effect to be executed .

Images